Planning Instructions Fire Alarm System EBL512

Planning Instructions
MEW01776
Revision -
Fire Alarm System EBL512 G3
V2.2.x
Author:
Jan Pettersson
Date of issue: 2015-01-19
Date of rev:
This page has deliberately been left blank.
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Table of contents
1
2
Introduction________________________________ 9
Definitions / Explanations ___________________ 11
2.1
2.2
PESN AB _______________________________________ 11
Alarm points _____________________________________ 11
2.2.1
Smoke detector _______________________________ 11
2.2.2
Sensor ______________________________________ 11
2.2.3
Analog detector _______________________________ 11
2.2.4
Analog Sensor Base (ASB) ______________________ 11
2.2.5
Conventional detector __________________________ 11
2.2.6
Conventional Detector Base (CDB) _______________ 11
2.2.7
Addressable __________________________________ 12
2.2.8
Conventional zone line input / External line _________ 12
2.3
Output unit ______________________________________ 12
2.4
Output / Control output _____________________________ 12
2.5
Short circuit isolator (ISO) __________________________ 12
2.6
Display unit (D.U.) ________________________________ 12
2.7
COM loop _______________________________________ 12
2.8
Control Unit / C.U. / C.I.E. __________________________ 12
2.9
Fire Brigade Panel (FBP) ___________________________ 12
2.10 Control panel (CP) ________________________________ 13
2.11 System / Installation _______________________________ 13
2.12 Network / TLON® / LonWorks® / Echelon / Node / TLON
Conn. board / Channel / Backbone net / Router / Repeater _______ 13
2.13 LED ____________________________________________ 13
2.14 External Indicator (Ext. LED) ________________________ 13
2.15 Display / LCD ____________________________________ 14
2.16 Door open (Door / Key switch) _______________________ 14
2.17 Site Specific Data (SSD) ____________________________ 14
2.18 Software (S/W) / Firmware / System program ___________ 14
2.19 EBLWin ________________________________________ 14
2.20 Web-server ______________________________________ 14
2.21 EN54-13 ________________________________________ 14
3
Overview _________________________________ 15
3.1
The EBL512 G3 system ____________________________ 15
3.1.1
Printer ______________________________________ 15
3.1.2
Expansion boards _____________________________ 15
3.1.3
Power supply _________________________________ 16
3.2
Software (S/W) versions ____________________________ 16
3.3
Documents ______________________________________ 16
3.4
Applications _____________________________________ 16
3.5
PC programs _____________________________________ 16
3.5.1
EBLWin ____________________________________ 16
1
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
3.5.2
TLON Manager _______________________________ 17
4
Control Unit / TLON Network _______________ 18
4.1
4.2
The TLON Network _______________________________ 18
Single TLON Network / Redundant TLON Network ______ 18
5
Control Units 5000 and 5001 _________________ 20
5.1
Mounting plates___________________________________ 23
5.1.1
Mounting plate for 19" mounting rack, 5020 ________ 23
5.1.2
Mounting plate for inflammable wall, 5021 _________ 23
5.2
COM loops ______________________________________ 23
5.3
Programmable voltage outputs (S0-S3) ________________ 24
5.4
Programmable relay outputs (R0-R1) __________________ 24
5.5
Programmable inputs (I0-I3) _________________________ 24
5.6
Relay outputs for routing equipment (tx) _______________ 25
5.6.1
Fire alarm output ______________________________ 25
5.6.2
Fault condition output __________________________ 25
6
Expansion boards 458x _____________________ 26
6.1
6.2
Expansion board no. (address) setting__________________ 27
8 zones expansion board 4580 _______________________ 27
6.2.1
Type of zone line input _________________________ 28
6.2.2
Input states __________________________________ 28
6.3
8 relays expansion board 4581 _______________________ 29
6.4
Inputs and outputs expansion board 4583 _______________ 30
6.5
Inputs and outputs expansion board 4583DE ____________ 31
6.6
I/O Matrix board 4582 _____________________________ 33
6.6.1
Generic _____________________________________ 34
6.6.2
Fan control __________________________________ 34
6.6.3
Zone control _________________________________ 35
7
Printer ___________________________________ 36
7.1
7.2
EBL512 G3 ______________________________________ 36
Ext. Fire Brigade Panel 1826 ________________________ 36
8
TLON connection board 5090 ________________ 37
8.1
8.2
8.3
Single TLON Network _____________________________ 37
Redundant TLON network __________________________ 37
Network programming _____________________________ 37
9
Peripheral devices __________________________ 38
9.1
COM loop units ___________________________________ 38
9.1.1
Input units ___________________________________ 40
9.1.2
Addressable I/O units __________________________ 53
9.1.3
Alarm devices (addressable sounders) _____________ 55
9.1.4
Short circuit isolators (addressable) _______________ 57
9.1.5
Built-in isolators ______________________________ 59
9.1.6
Units for Hazardous (Ex) areas ___________________ 59
9.1.7
Other COM loop units __________________________ 60
9.1.8
Obsolete units ________________________________ 62
2
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
9.2
Units connected to the RS485 interface ________________ 62
9.2.1
External Fire Brigade Panels _____________________ 63
9.2.2
Alert Annunciation Units _______________________ 64
9.2.3
External Presentation Units ______________________ 65
9.2.4
German Fire Brigade Panels - Schraner ____________ 66
9.2.5
Swiss Fire Brigade Panel - IFAM _________________ 67
9.2.6
German Fire Brigade Panels - IFAM ______________ 68
9.3
Units connected to the RS232 interface J7 ______________ 68
9.3.1
Web-servers__________________________________ 68
9.4
Other units _______________________________________ 69
9.4.1
Alert Annunciation Controllers ___________________ 69
9.4.2
External LED ________________________________ 70
9.4.3
Alarm devices (sounders, etc.) ___________________ 70
9.4.4
Door release magnets __________________________ 70
9.4.5
Boxes _______________________________________ 71
9.4.6
Duct detector chambers _________________________ 71
9.4.7
German key cabinet____________________________ 71
10
Programmable inputs _______________________ 72
10.1 Control unit Inputs I0 - I3 ___________________________ 72
10.2 Inputs 0 - 4 on exp. board 4583_______________________ 72
10.2.1 Not supervised________________________________ 72
10.2.2 Supervised ___________________________________ 72
10.3 Inputs 0 - 4 on exp. board 4583DE ____________________ 73
10.3.1 Not supervised________________________________ 73
10.3.2 Supervised ___________________________________ 73
10.4 The 3361 unit's Inputs In0 / Z & In1 ___________________ 74
10.4.1 Input In0 ____________________________________ 74
10.4.2 Input In1 ____________________________________ 74
11
Input programming ________________________ 75
11.1 Trigger conditions _________________________________ 75
11.2 Logic ___________________________________________ 78
11.2.1 Supervised ___________________________________ 79
12
Programmable outputs ______________________ 80
12.1 Control unit outputs S0 – S3 _________________________ 81
12.2 Control unit outputs R0 & R1 ________________________ 82
12.3 8 relays expansion board 4581 Output 0 – Output 7 _______ 82
12.4 Inputs and Outputs expansion board 4583 Output 0 & Output 182
12.5 Inputs and Outputs expansion board 4583DE Output 0 &
Output 1_______________________________________________ 82
12.6 The 3361 unit's Outputs Re0 & Re1 ___________________ 83
12.7 The 3364 unit's VO0 – VO2 _________________________ 83
12.8 The 3377 / 4477 unit's Output (siren) __________________ 83
12.9 The 3379 unit's Output (sounder) _____________________ 84
12.10
The 4380 unit's Output (beacon) ____________________ 84
12.11
The 4383 unit's Output (light) ______________________ 84
3
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
12.12
13
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The 4611 wireless smoke detector Output (sounder) ____ 84
Output programming _______________________ 85
13.1 Type of output ____________________________________ 85
13.2 Logic ___________________________________________ 86
13.3 Supervised / Not supervised _________________________ 86
13.4 Output signal period _______________________________ 86
13.5 Control expression ________________________________ 89
13.5.1 Trigger conditions _____________________________ 89
13.5.2 Logical operators ______________________________ 96
13.5.3 Control expression examples ____________________ 96
14
15
Short circuit isolators ______________________ 101
Interlocking function ______________________ 104
15.1 Programming of interlocking function ________________ 104
15.1.1 Interlocking output ___________________________ 104
15.1.2 Interlocking input ____________________________ 104
15.1.3 Interlocking combination ______________________ 104
15.2 Interlocking indications ____________________________ 106
15.3 Interlocking outputs and inputs (H9) _________________ 106
15.3.1 Activated interlocking outputs / inputs (H9/C1) _____ 106
15.3.2 Activate / deactivate interlocking output (H9/C2) ___ 107
15.3.3 Disable / re-enable interlocking output (H9/C3) _____ 107
15.4 Interlocking control expressions _____________________ 107
16
17
Fire Door Closing _________________________ 108
Functions / Services / Features ______________ 109
17.1 Sensor value ____________________________________ 109
17.2 Week average sensor value _________________________ 109
17.3 Decision value ___________________________________ 110
17.4 Alarm algorithms for smoke detectors / Detection levels /
Offsets 110
17.4.1 Alarm algorithm / Alternative alarm algorithm _____ 111
17.4.2 Filtering algorithm ___________________________ 112
17.4.3 Smouldering smoke algorithm __________________ 114
17.4.4 Performance factor ___________________________ 115
17.5 Algorithms for analog heat detectors _________________ 116
17.5.1 Class A1 algorithm ___________________________ 116
17.5.2 Class A2 S algorithm _________________________ 117
17.5.3 Class B S algorithm ___________________________ 117
17.6 Self verification __________________________________ 117
17.7 Minimum / Maximum sensor values __________________ 118
17.8 2-zone / 2-address dependence (Co-incidence alarm) _____ 119
17.8.1 2-zone dependence ___________________________ 119
17.8.2 2-address (-unit) dependence ___________________ 120
17.8.3 Reset of 2-zone / 2-address dependence (co-incidence
alarm 120
17.9 Delayed alarm ___________________________________ 121
4
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
17.10
Selective Alarm Presentation _____________________ 121
17.11
Alarm Verification Facility _______________________ 121
17.12
Alert Annunciation _____________________________ 122
17.13
Local Alarm Acknowledgement (LAA) _____________ 124
17.14
Quiet alarm ___________________________________ 126
17.15
Fire alarm type A and Fire alarm type B _____________ 126
17.15.1
Fire alarm type B ___________________________ 127
17.15.2
Fire alarm type A __________________________ 127
17.16
Disable alarm points and outputs __________________ 127
17.16.1
Disable zone ______________________________ 128
17.16.2
Disable zone / address _______________________ 128
17.16.3
Disable control output _______________________ 128
17.16.4
Disable / Re-enable output type _______________ 128
17.16.5
Disable / Re-enable alarm devices _____________ 128
17.17
Disable interlocking output _______________________ 129
17.18
Disable outputs for routing equipment ______________ 129
17.19
Disconnect & Re-connect loop / zone line input_______ 129
17.20
External time channels __________________________ 129
17.21
Test mode ____________________________________ 129
17.22
Test alarm devices ______________________________ 130
17.23
Test of outputs _________________________________ 130
17.24
Test of routing equipment ________________________ 130
17.25
Calibration of supervised outputs __________________ 131
17.26
Service signal _________________________________ 131
17.27
Fault signal (fault condition) ______________________ 131
17.28
Alarm texts ___________________________________ 132
17.28.1
Creating the alarm texts via EBLWin ___________ 132
17.28.2
Downloading alarm texts to the DU:s 1728 / 1735 /
1736 and ext. FBP:s 1826 / 1828 ________________________ 134
17.29
Real time clock (RTC) __________________________ 134
17.29.1
Daylight saving time ________________________ 134
17.30
Loss of main power source _______________________ 135
17.30.1
Fault: Loss of main power source ______________ 135
17.30.2
LCD backlight _____________________________ 135
17.31
Evacuate _____________________________________ 135
17.32
Zone groups___________________________________ 135
18
19
Special New Zealand functions ______________ 137
Advanced mode ___________________________ 138
19.1 Pulse up – down counter ___________________________ 139
19.1.1 Pulse up – down counter for smoke ______________ 139
19.1.2 Pulse up – down counter for temperature __________ 140
19.1.3 Pulse up – down counter for smoke & temperature __ 140
19.2 Fire judgement __________________________________ 140
19.3 Alarm threshold levels ____________________________ 140
19.4 Alarm delay time _________________________________ 141
5
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
19.5 Learning function / Learning period __________________ 142
19.5.1 Area Alarm algorithms ________________________ 142
19.6 Analog data output _______________________________ 144
19.7 Sensitivity compensation __________________________ 144
19.8 Self diagnosis of internal devices ____________________ 145
19.9 Address setting check _____________________________ 145
19.10
Polling LED __________________________________ 145
20
Control unit properties ____________________ 146
20.1 Control unit properties dialog box ___________________ 146
20.1.1 General Information __________________________ 146
20.1.2 Peripherals __________________________________ 146
20.1.3 Misc. ______________________________________ 146
20.2 EBLWin Control unit pop-up menu __________________ 147
20.2.1 Reset alarm counter ___________________________ 147
20.2.2 Software version _____________________________ 148
20.2.3 Upgrade number of alarm points _________________ 148
20.2.4 Show event log ______________________________ 148
20.2.5 Restart _____________________________________ 149
20.2.6 Delete _____________________________________ 149
20.2.7 Properties___________________________________ 149
20.2.8 Add Web-server _____________________________ 149
21
System properties (settings) _________________ 150
21.1 System properties dialog box _______________________ 150
21.1.1 Name ______________________________________ 150
21.1.2 User definable text ___________________________ 150
21.1.3 System properties, Page 1 ______________________ 150
21.1.4 System properties, Page 2 ______________________ 152
22
EBLWin menus ___________________________ 154
22.1 The File menu ___________________________________ 154
22.1.1 New _______________________________________ 154
22.1.2 Open ______________________________________ 154
22.1.3 Import from Win512 __________________________ 154
22.1.4 Report _____________________________________ 154
22.1.5 Save _______________________________________ 155
22.1.6 Save As ____________________________________ 155
22.1.7 Print labels__________________________________ 155
22.2 The View menu __________________________________ 155
22.2.1 Tree view___________________________________ 155
22.2.2 Deviations __________________________________ 156
22.2.3 Selected loop ________________________________ 156
22.2.4 Alarm points ________________________________ 156
22.2.5 Interlocking combinations ______________________ 157
22.2.6 External faults _______________________________ 157
22.2.7 Technical warnings ___________________________ 157
22.2.8 External time channels ________________________ 158
6
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
22.3 The System menu ________________________________ 158
22.3.1 Properties___________________________________ 158
22.3.2 Time channels _______________________________ 158
22.3.3 Alarm algorithms ____________________________ 160
22.3.4 Output Signal Periods _________________________ 162
22.3.5 National holidays ____________________________ 163
22.3.6 Two zone dependence _________________________ 164
22.3.7 Zone groups _________________________________ 165
22.3.8 System information ___________________________ 166
22.3.9 Edit Alarm texts _____________________________ 166
22.3.10
User data _________________________________ 166
22.4 The Tools menu__________________________________ 168
22.4.1 Web-server _________________________________ 169
23
Download SSD____________________________ 171
23.1 COM loop menu _________________________________ 172
23.1.1 Check Loop _________________________________ 172
23.1.2 Auto generate loop ___________________________ 172
23.2 Single Control Unit _______________________________ 173
23.3 Control Units in a TLON network ___________________ 173
23.4 User definable text messages download _______________ 173
24
Download software (S/W) __________________ 174
24.1
24.2
Single control unit (c.i.e.) __________________________ 174
Control Units in a TLON network ___________________ 176
25
26
Compatibility_____________________________ 177
Cable types ______________________________ 178
26.1
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.5
26.6
TLON Network cables ____________________________ 178
COM loop cables_________________________________ 178
Ext. FBP / Display Units cables _____________________ 178
Conventional zone line cables _______________________ 178
Alarm device cables ______________________________ 179
Other cables_____________________________________ 179
27
28
29
COM loop cable length_____________________ 180
Current consumption ______________________ 183
Power supply _____________________________ 188
29.1 Charger functions ________________________________ 189
29.1.1 Charging ___________________________________ 189
29.1.2 Battery charging functions: _____________________ 189
29.1.3 Security functions ____________________________ 189
29.2 Current consumption calculations ____________________ 190
29.3 Power supply (rectifier) - main power source ___________ 191
29.4 Battery - second power source ______________________ 191
29.5 Fuses __________________________________________ 192
29.6 Form / Table of current consumption _________________ 193
30
S/W versions _____________________________ 194
7
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
31
32
Technical data ____________________________ 195
Limitations_______________________________ 196
32.1
32.2
User definable texts _______________________________ 196
C.i.e. / System ___________________________________ 196
33
34
35
National regulations _______________________ 198
Drawings / connection diagrams _____________ 199
Revision history ___________________________ 200
Drawings according to the valid table of drawings.
8
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
1
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Introduction
EBL512 G3 Planning Instructions is a document1 intended to be used
by planning engineers as well as service / commissioning engineers.
This document should be read in conjunction with the drawings
according to the valid Table of drawings and the EBL512 G3
Operating Instructions MEW01777.
When planning a fire alarm installation the national regulations have
to be obeyed. A lot of detector types can be used. Detector coverage
area and detector placing in the room / building, etc. are matters for
the planning engineers and are not described in this document.
Due to continual development and improvement, different S/W
versions might be found. This document is valid for S/W version
2.2.x. On the date / revision date of the document x = -.
Since the EBL512 G3 control unit (c.i.e.) is produced for many
countries the look, the texts, the functions, etc. might vary.
Products
Consists of one or more parts (HW) according to a Product Parts
List. A product has:
 a type number
5000 EBL512 G3 c.i.e. Configured for 128, 256 or 512 alarm
points and with or without printer depending on article number.
5001 EBL512 G3 c.i.e. No front panel and no Plexiglas in the
door. Configured for 128, 256 or 512 alarm points depending
on the article number.
 an article number is often the same as the type no. but a country
code can be added (e.g. SE for Sweden). If the letters PRT also
are added in the article number the product comes with a printer.
If digits are added to the article number they are showing the
configured number of alarm points (e.g. 5000PRTSE-128).

a product name (e.g. EBL512 G3 CU, 128 alarm points, with
printer)
HW
A HW (e.g. a printed circuit board) has:

a type number (e.g. 5010)

an article number, often the same as the type no. but sometimes a
country code is added (e.g. 5010SE)
1
File name: L:\User documents\512 G3\V2.1.x\MEW01737 (Rev 1).doc
9
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x

a product name (e.g. Main Board 128 alarm points)

a p.c.b. number (e.g. 9290-2B) and can also have a configuration
(e.g. CFG: 2) and a revision (e.g. REV: 1)

sometimes a S/W
S/W
A S/W has:

a version number (e.g. V2.2.x)

sometimes additional information, such as Convention (different
functions / facilities), Language, Number of addresses, etc.
PC S/W
A PC S/W is a program used for programming, commissioning, etc.
(e.g. EBLWin). It has a version number (e.g. V2.2.x).
10
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Definitions / Explanations
Definitions / explanations / abbreviations / etc. frequently used or not
explained elsewhere in the document.
2.1
PESN AB
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
2.2
Alarm points
Units, which can generate a fire alarm (in the control unit), i.e. analog
detectors (sensors), conventional detectors, manual call points, etc.
2.2.1
Smoke detector
Analog or conventional photoelectric (optical) smoke detector
2.2.2
Sensor
Sensor = Analog detector
2.2.3
Analog detector
Contains an A/D-converter. The Control Unit pick up the digital
values ("sensor values") for each detector individually.
All
evaluations and "decisions" are then made by alarm algorithms in the
C.U. As from version 2.0.x the latest detector generation (440x) can
be used in "Advanced mode", i.e. the alarm algorithms are in the
detector instead. Analog detectors are addressable – an address
setting tool 4414 is used for the detector's COM loop address and
mode settings.
An analog detector has to be plugged in an Analog Sensor Base
(ASB).
2.2.4
Analog Sensor Base (ASB)
An analog detector is plugged in an ASB, which is connected to a
COM loop (see below).
2.2.5
Conventional detector
A detector with only two statuses, i.e. normal or fire alarm. The
detector has a "closing contact" and a series alarm resistor. Normally
plugged in a conventional detector base CDB (see below), which is
connected to a conventional zone line input. Some types (e.g. water
proof types) are connected directly on zone line. An end-of-line
device has to be connected in the last unit on the zone line.
2.2.6
Conventional Detector Base (CDB)
A conventional detector is plugged in a CDB, connected to a
conventional zone line input.
11
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
2.2.7
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Addressable
A unit with a built-in address device, i.e. each unit is individually
identified, handled and indicated in the Control Unit.
(The unit can be an I/O unit with a zone line input, to which one or
more conventional "alarm points" can be connected.)
2.2.8
Conventional zone line input / External line
Input intended for one or more conventional alarm points. End-of-line
device in the last alarm point on the line.
2.3
Output unit
Addressable unit with programmable control outputs. Connected to a
COM loop (see below).
2.4
Output / Control output
Defined or programmable function. Relay output or voltage output
(supervised / monitored or not), in the Control Unit or an output unit
connected on a COM loop.
2.5
Short circuit isolator (ISO)
Addressable unit for automatic disconnection of a part (segment) of a
COM loop (see below) in case of short circuit on the loop.
(According to EN54-2, one ISO is required per 32 alarm points.)
2.6
Display unit (D.U.)
Addressable unit (RS485 line) for fire alarm presentation (incl. user
definable alarm text), alert annunciation, etc.
2.7
COM loop
Loop = a cable, twisted pair, to which all the addressable units can be
connected. Starts in the Control Unit and returns back to the C.U.
2.8
Control Unit / C.U. / C.I.E.
Control Unit = Control and Indicating Equipment (c.i.e.) = Unit to
which the alarm points are connected (via e.g. a COM loop).
Indicates fire alarm, fault condition, etc. Fire Brigade Panel &
Control Panel, i.e. the front, included or not included. Printer included
or not included.
2.9
Fire Brigade Panel (FBP)
Intended for fire alarm presentation, etc. for the fire brigade personnel.
Can be a part of the control unit (a part of the front) or a separate
Display Unit (external FBP).
In an ext. FBP, a printer can be included.
12
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
2.10
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Control panel (CP)
A part of the control unit (a part of the front), intended for the building
occupier / officer, service personnel, etc., to "communicate" with the
Control Unit / the System.
2.11
System / Installation
One control unit or several control units connected via a TLON
network (co-operating control units).
2.12
Network / TLON® / LonWorks® / Echelon /
Node / TLON Conn. board / Channel /
Backbone net / Router / Repeater
Brief explanations to the words/expressions to be found in connection
with a "TLON Network". See also separate TLON Technical
description.
TLON® = TeleLarm Local Operating Network = a LonWorks®- based
network2 for communication between several control units/nodes. The
protocol is called LonTalk and the transmission works with doublyterminated bus topology (Echelon FTT-10). To connect a control unit
to a network, a TLON connection board has to be plugged in each
control unit. EBL512 G3 also supports a redundant TLON Network.
In this case two TLON connection boards have to be plugged in each
control unit.
A network can be one channel (FTT-10) or several channels,
connected via routers. (In a TLON Network a sub net = a channel.)
Routers are used for safety reasons in a single TLON Network (up to
six control units per channel). Routers can also be used to increase the
distance (cable length) between the end nodes in a channel.
Router or Repeater is the same type of unit (different configuration).
All network programming (configuration) is made with the PC
program TLON Manager. See also separate TLON Manager
Operating Instructions.
2.13
LED
LED (Light Emitting Diode) = Yellow, green or red optical indicator
("lamp").
2.14
External Indicator (Ext. LED)
A unit with a red LED connected to a base (ASB / CDB) or a detector
with an output for an ext. LED.
Lit when the built-in LED in the detector / base is lit.
2
LonWorks® = A "summing-up-name" for the market of Echelon
Corporation Inc. technology.
13
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
2.15
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Display / LCD
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) = Display (in the c.i.e. or Display unit)
for presentation of fire alarms, fault messages, etc. In EBL512 G3 it
is a graphical monochrome LCD (320 x 240 dots) with backlight.
2.16
Door open (Door / Key switch)
In EBL512 G3 and ext. FBP 1826 there is a door switch, which is
activated when the door is open. In the ext. FBP 1828 this door
switch is replaced with a key switch.
An open door is indicated in the LCD (i.e. an "open door" icon).
2.17
Site Specific Data (SSD)
The SSD is unique for each installation.
All alarm points,
presentation numbers, user definable alarm texts, programmable
outputs, etc. are created in the PC program EBLWin and also
downloaded in EBL512 G3 unit(s) with EBLWin.
2.18
Software (S/W) / Firmware / System
program
The software (S/W) – also called Firmware and System program –
makes the control unit (the microprocessor) work. It is factory
downloaded but another / new version can, via the PC program
EBLWin, be downloaded in EBL512 G3 on site.
2.19
EBLWin
PC program used to create and download the SSD in EBL512 G3
unit(s). Also used to download another / new software version and to
upgrade the maximum number of alarm points in EBL512 G3.
Can be used during commissioning / maintenance of the EBL512 G3
system (autogenerate COM loop SSD, acknowledge faults, etc.)
2.20
Web-server
The Web-server is used to get EBL512 G3 information as well as
remote control via a PC (browser) and an intranet / internet. The
Web-server is configured via the PC tool EBLWin.
2.21
EN54-13
Fire detection and fire alarm systems;
assessment of system components.
14
Part 13:
Compatibility
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
3
Overview
3.1
The EBL512 G3 system
EBL512 G3 is a microprocessor controlled intelligent fire alarm
system, intended for analog addressable detectors, as well as
conventional detectors and manual call points. Programmable control
outputs and output units are available. Up to 1020 addresses (of
which up to 512 can be alarm points) can be connected to each control
unit (c.i.e.) - according to EN54-2.
EBL512 G3 is available in several types, versions and configurations.
EBL512 G3 can be used as a stand-alone control unit or connected to
a TLON Network, i.e. a "system" with up to 30 control units. Each
control unit has access to all information.
Product type no. Product name
5000
EBL512 G3 c.i.e. With or without a printer3.
With front and display.
5001
EBL512 G3 c.i.e. Without front, display, printer
or door. (A "grey box".)
EBL512 G3 is developed and designed according to the European
standard EN54, part 2 and 4. The Swedish front conforms to SS3654.
3.1.1
Printer
The control unit EBL512 G3 type 5000 can be delivered with a
printer3 ("PRN" included in the article number) or without a printer.
In the Ext. Fire Brigade Panel 1826 it is possible to mount an optional
Printer 1835.
3.1.2
Expansion boards
In the control unit (c.i.e.) it is possible to mount up to six expansion
boards4. The following expansion board types are available:
Product type no.
4580
4581
4583
4583DE
Product name
Note
8 zones expansion board
8 relay outputs expansion board
In- and outputs expansion board
In- and outputs expansion board
Regarding the expansion boards, see also chapter "Expansion boards
458x", page 26 and EBL512 G3 drawings.
3
The printer is available as a spare part (5058), i.e. it comes without any
mounting frame, connection cable, etc.
4
Max five expansion boards if a redundancy module for German FBP is
used. For more information see chapter “German Fire Brigade Panels Schraner”, page 66.
15
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
3.1.3
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Power supply
The main power source is a built-in switched power supply (rectifier)
5037. 230 V AC, 1.6 A / 24 V DC, 6.5 A.
The second power source is a backup battery (2 x 12 V). In the c.i.e.
is space for two 28 Ah batteries. Larger batteries (up to 65 Ah) have
to be placed outside the c.i.e.
The batteries and the power supply are connected to the Main board
(5010), which handles the charging of the batteries, etc. See chapter
"Power supply", page 188 for more information.
3.2
Software (S/W) versions
Due to continual development and improvement, different S/W
versions can be found. When installing a new control unit in a system
with "older" control units, you might have to upgrade the S/W in the
old control units (or download an older S/W version in the new
control unit). The same S/W version is required in all control units
in a TLON Network.
3.3
Documents
The following EBL512 G3 documents are available:
 Planning Instructions (this doc.)
 Operating Instructions MEW01777
 Drawings (connection diagrams, etc.)
Normally, information found in one of the documents is not found in
another document, i.e. the documents complement each other.
For the TLON Network / TLON Manager, Web-server, etc. are
separate documents available.
3.4
Applications
The EBL512 G3 system is intended for small, medium and large
installations. The intelligent control units offer the system designer
and end user a technically sophisticated range of facilities and
functions. Programming (with the PC programs EBLWin and TLON
Manager) and commissioning the control units / system is very easy.
Start with one control unit and later when it is required, add more
units. The TLON Network makes it possible to install the control
units in one building or in different buildings.
3.5
PC programs
The following PC programs are used together with the EBL512 G3
system.
3.5.1
EBLWin
The PC program EBLWin is used for programming and
commissioning of one or more control units, i.e. to:
16
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
autogenerate, i.e. to identify the units connected on a COM loop and
make default settings, which can be edited, saved and used as site
specific data (SSD).

create and download / make a backup (upload) of site specific data
(SSD).

download new software / settings / convention / configurations /
control unit & system properties / etc.

create and download the user definable alarm texts shown in the
display in the control units / ext. FBPs and other Display Units.

see the fire alarms, faults and disablements as well as reset,
acknowledge and re-enable respectively.

configure the Web-server II (1598); create and download / make
a backup (upload) of the configuration data as well as download
of Web-server software.
EBLWin shall have the same version number as the EBL512 G3
software version number, e.g. 2.2.x and 2.2.x respectively. (x
indicates only a small correction and is not required to be the same.)
Old SSD files can be opened in a newer (higher) version of EBLWin,
saved, edited and thereafter downloaded to EBL512 G3 units with the
corresponding version.
3.5.2
TLON Manager
The PC program TLON Manager is used for the TLON Network
programming, installation, etc. (TLON Manager 1.2 and TLON
Manager 2.0.x can be used.)
17
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
4
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Control Unit / TLON Network
See also chapter "TLON connection board 5090", page 37.
4.1
The TLON Network
An installation (a system) can be one control unit (c.i.e.) or up to 30
control units connected in a TLON Network.
In a TLON Network each control unit works independent but has
nevertheless total access to all information in the system.
NOTE!
In a system with two or more control units in a TLON Network, pay
attention to the following:
4.2

A zone must not be distributed over the system, i.e. all alarm
points in a zone have to be connected to one c.i.e.

When the "Fire door closing" function is used, the alarm points
and their "belonging" output must be connected to the same c.i.e.

When the interlocking function is used, the input, the output and
the Interlocking Combination (area-point) must be in / connected
to the same c.i.e. An input and an output can only be used in one
Interlocking Combination.

When the Local Alarm Acknowledgement (LAA) function is
used, all devices within the same LAA zone must be connected to
the same c.i.e.
Single TLON Network / Redundant TLON
Network
The EBL512 G3 system can be build up as a single TLON Network
or as a redundant TLON Network.
In a single TLON Network, one TLON connection board (5090) has
to be plugged in each control unit whereas in a redundant TLON
Network, two TLON connection boards have to be plugged in each
control unit.
In the single TLON Network is only one network (Network no. 0) but
in a redundant TLON Network are two networks (Network no. 0 and
Network no. 1). Network no. 1 is only supervised / monitored until
Network no. 0 is not working properly.
The redundant TLON Network supports full functionality also in case
of a network fault (i.e. open circuit or short circuit) in one of the
TLON networks. A fault in one of the TLON Networks generates the
following fault:
FAULT: Control unit xx has no contact
with control unit xx, network x
Where network x = Network no. 0 or Network no. 1.
18
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
NOTE!
In a system where each control unit is independent of the other (i.e.
each control unit works like a "standalone" control unit) a single
TLON Network may be sufficient. To maintain security, in this case:

All control units shall be of type 5000, i.e. including front panel.

The alarm points and their "belonging" outputs shall be connected
to the same control unit.

If fire alarm routing equipment ("Fire brigade tx" output) shall be
used, each control unit in the system shall be able to activate a fire
alarm routing equipment independent of the other control units.
In all other cases and for highest security, a redundant TLON Network
shall be used.
(According to EN54-13, 4.3.1.2: A single fault on a transmission
path connecting one CIE to another CIE, shall not adversely affect the
correct functioning of any part of the networked system.)
19
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
5
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Control Units 5000 and 5001
Two types of control units are available:
Type no.
Product
Front
(FBP with
display & CP)
5000
EBL512 G3 c.i.e. configured for 128, 256 or
512 alarm points and with or without printer
is depending on the article number.
Expansion boards can be mounted (option).
Yes
5001
EBL512 G3 c.i.e. configured for 128, 256 or
512 alarm points depending on the article
number.
Printer cannot be mounted.
Expansion boards can be mounted (option).
No
Figure 1. Left: The EBL512 G3 Control Unit 5000, with printer. The look might
vary according to configuration, etc. Right: The EBL512 G3 Control Unit 5001.
(No front with display, no printer and no door.)
The control unit is housed in a grey metal cabinet. Depending on
country, convention, configuration, etc. the look, language and
functions might vary, as well as the max. number of alarm points
(128, 256 or 512) it is configured for5. In total, 1020 COM loop units
(addresses) can always be used, of which 512 can be alarm points.
5
Max. no. of alarm points can be upgraded on site.
20
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The door in type 5000 has a Plexiglas ahead of the front, see Figure 1
and Figure 2 respectively.
Figure 2. The EBL512 G3 front with display ("Man-MachineInterface"); The Fire Brigade Panel (FBP) is the upper part and
the Control Panel (CP) is the lower part. The look might vary
depending on the language, country, etc.
The FBP is used by the fire brigade personnel to see which alarm
point(s) / zone(s) having activated fire alarm and to take required
operational control of the system. In the graphical display, the
information displayed in the upper part is depending on how many
alarm points / zones having activated fire alarm. In the middle part
will the fire alarms be shown, i.e. one alarm point or one zone together
with a user definable alarm text (if programmed) plus some other
information.
External FBPs are also available.
The CP is used to "communicate" with the system, i.e. for
commissioning, monthly tests, maintenance, etc. To get access to the
system (a menu tree with main and sub menus) and for operational
control of the system, up to ten User names can be used for three
different User level types. A Password (six digits) for each User
name is required.6
The CP has several system status LEDs and a keypad.
NOTE! Regarding LED indicators, keypad / push buttons / soft keys,
user level types and for more information, see EBL512 G3 Operating
Instructions MEW01776.
6
The same User names and Passwords (for the different user levels) could
be used for logon to the Web-server.
21
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Each control unit 5000-5001 has the following basic configuration:

Grey metal cabinet
 DIN rail for Web-server (1598).

MMI board (5011) (not in 5001). See dwg. 512 G3 - 12.
 EBL512 G3 front with display (not in 5001)

Main board (5010). See dwg. 512 G3 - 11.
 Four COM loops (0-3) to which the loop units are connected.
See dwg. 512 G3 – 25 and – 31.
 Four programmable supervised voltage outputs (S0-S3). See
dwg. 512 G3 - 23.
 Two programmable relay outputs (R0-R1). See dwg. 512 G3 23.
 Four programmable inputs (I0-I3). See dwg. 512 G3 - 23.
 Six 24 V DC outputs (power supply outputs for Web-server II
(1598), routing equipment and external equipment). See dwg.
512 G3 - 22.
 Two not programmable relay outputs for routing equipment
(Fire alarm output for Fire brigade tx and Fault condition
output for Fault tx). See dwg. 512 G3 - 24.
 Space & connectors for two TLON connection boards (1590 /
5090). See dwg. 512 G3 - 24.
 RS485 and 24 V DC outputs for Display Units (1728, 1735,
1736, 1826 & 1828). See dwg. 512 G3 - 24.
 Connector for expansion boards (4580, 4581 & 4583). See
dwg. 512 G3 - 26.
 Connectors for Web-server (1598). See dwg. 512 G3 - 32.
 Battery charger.


Connectors for power supply (rectifier) and batteries. See
dwg. 512 G3 - 21.
Built-in power supply. See chapter "Power supply", page 188.
Connections and more information, see dwg. 512 G3 - 21.
 Switched power supply (rectifier), 230 V AC / 24 V DC
(5037).
 Space and connection cables for two Sealed Lead-Acid backup
batteries (12 V, 28 Ah).
 Battery temperature sensor.

Space for up to six expansion boards (458x).
See following chapters for more and detailed information.
22
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
5.1
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Mounting plates
The 5000 and 5001 units are delivered with a mounting plate
approved for mounting on an incombustible wall (e.g. concrete).
5.1.1
Mounting plate for 19" mounting rack, 5020
When the 5000 and 5001 units shall be mounted in a 19" mounting
rack, the standard mounting plate can be replaced with a Mounting
plate for 19" mounting rack 5020.
5.1.2
Mounting plate for inflammable wall, 5021
When the 5000 and 5001 units shall be mounted on an inflammable
wall (e.g. wood), the standard mounting plate should be replaced with
a Mounting plate for inflammable wall 5021, which can be provided
with cable glands.
Figure 3. The standard mounting plate, the Mounting plate for
19" mounting rack 5020 and the Mounting plate for inflammable
wall 5021.
5.2
COM loops
Each control unit has four COM loops (0-3) to which the loop units
are connected. Connections according to dwg 512 G3 – 25, - 31, - 36,
- 37 & - 38.
On each COM loop can up to 255 COM loop units be connected
(COM loop address 001 – 255). Regarding type and number of COM
loop units in relation to the cable length / type, see dwg 512 G3 – 41
and chapters "COM loop cable length", page 180 and "Current
consumption", page 183.
NOTE! In total, up to 1020 (4 x 255) COM loop addresses can be
used but only 512 can be alarm points, according to EN54-2.
Each COM loop unit has a COM loop address (e.g. 123) and
depending on the loop number (e.g. 0) and the control unit number
(e.g. 04) each COM loop unit will get a technical number (04 0 123).
Each alarm point and zone line input has a fire alarm presentation
number (Zone-Address), e.g. 001-01. See EBL512 G3 Operating
Instructions MEW01777 for more information.
23
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Normally the communication (and power supply) direction alternates
every 22nd second. When the communication is in the COM loop Adirection, the COM loop voltage is checked when the COM loop cable
returns to the control unit. The voltage has to be > 12 V DC. If not, a
fault will be generated.
5.3
Programmable voltage outputs (S0-S3)
The 24 V DC outputs S0-S3 are supervised (monitored)7.
Connections according to dwg 512 G3 – 23, sheet 1. When all
connections are done a calibration has to be performed, see chapter
"Calibration of supervised outputs", page 131 and the EBL512 G3
Operating Instructions MEW01777, chapter "Calibration of
supervised outputs (menu H5/A1)". The calibration value has to be
1K-50K.
Each output has to be programmed (via EBLWin) regarding:
 Type of output, i.e. output for Control, Alarm devices, etc.
 Logic, i.e. normally low (default) or normally high (24 V DC)8.
 Activation time and type / output signal period (steady, pulse,
delay, etc.).
 Control expression (one or more trigger conditions).
See also chapter "Programmable outputs", page 80.
NOTE! For EN54-13 compliance, connections have to be according
to dwg 512 G3 – 23, sheet 2, i.e. only one alarm device can be used (<
15 mA) and one 1K end-of-line resistor. Programmed as normally
low and supervised. .
5.4
Programmable relay outputs (R0-R1)
Connections according to dwg 512 G3 – 23.
Each output has to be programmed (via EBLWin) regarding:
 Type of output, i.e. output for Control, Alarm devices, etc.
 Logic, i.e. normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contacts.
 Activation time and type / output signal period (steady, pulse,
delay, etc.).
 Control expression (one or more trigger conditions).
See also chapter "Programmable outputs", page 80.
5.5
Programmable inputs (I0-I3)
Connections according to dwg 512 G3 – 23.
Each input has to be programmed (via EBLWin) regarding:
 Trigger condition (Triggered by).
 Logic, i.e. normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contacts.
7
The outputs are in EBLWin default set as supervised but via EBLWin it is
possible to set each output (S0-S3) individually to be not supervised.
8
A normally high output cannot be supervised.
24
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
 Additional information, depending on the selected trigger
condition (Fault no., Zone, Address, Fault message (Error text),
etc.)
Open = R > 20K. Closed = R < 500 .
An input has to be activated > 0.5 sec.
See also chapter "Programmable inputs", page 72.
5.6
Relay outputs for routing equipment (tx)
Not programmable outputs. The outputs can be tested via menu H1,
see the EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777. Connections
according to dwg 512 G3 – 24.
5.6.1
Fire alarm output
This output is normally used for fire alarm routing equipment (Fire
brigade tx). It is a change-over relay contact that will be activated
when a fire alarm is generated in the system9. Activated output is
(normally) indicated by the LED "Fire brigade tx".10
5.6.2
Fault condition output
This output is normally used for fault warning routing equipment
(Fault tx). It is a change-over relay contact that is normally activated
and will be de-activated in case of a fault11 in the control unit (c.i.e.)12.
De-activated output (i.e. fault condition) is indicated by the LED
Routing equipment "Fault tx activated".
9
The output can be disabled via "door open" or via menu H2/B5. See also
chapter "Alert Annunciation", page 119.
10
This output and programmable outputs with type of output = Fire brigade
tx, will normally turn on the LED but a programmable input with trigger
condition = Activated routing equipment, can turn on the LED instead.
11
Also when the control unit is out of power (i.e. power supply and battery
out of work) or Watch-dog fault.
12
The output can be disabled via "door open" or via menu H2/B5.
25
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
6
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Expansion boards 458x
Inside EBL512 G3 (5000 and 5001) there are spaces and holders for
up to six optional expansion boards13 of the types 4580, 4581 and
4583 to be mounted, see drawing 512 G3 - 01. One Exp. boards
connection cable 5089 shall be used for connection of up to six
expansion boards to the main board. (Connector "J2" on the
expansion board respectively and "J9" on the main board 5010.) See
dwg 512 G3 - 26.
Figure 4. 8 zones expansion board 4580, 8 relays expansion
board 4581 and In- and outputs expansion board 4583.
I/O Matrix board 458214 is a special type of "expansion board",
plugged as a "piggy back" to an Application board14, which is
connected to a COM loop and to 24 V DC. On each COM loop 0-3
can up to six 4582 boards be used (i.e. up to 24 boards in total).
NOTE! COM loop 0 is however a special loop, since the exp. boards
4580, 4581 and 4583 actually are internally connected on this loop.
On COM loop 0 can in total up to six 4580, 4581, 4583 and 4582
boards be used. This means that for each exp. board 4580, 4581 and
4583 used, the number of 4582 boards is reduced with one.
Figure 5. I/O Matrix board 4582.
Max. six of the I/O Matrix boards 4582 can be programmed as type
Generic and/or Zone control.
NOTE! < 512 programmable outputs per c.i.e. can be used.
13
Max five expansion boards if a redundancy module for German FBP is
used. For more information see chapter “German Fire Brigade Panels Schraner”, page 66.
14
The 4582 board can be programmed as type Fan, Generic or Zone control.
It is mostly used with Australian Application boards but the Fan control
application board 4594 (used with the Fan control panel 4593) is available on
all markets, see page 61.
26
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Each expansion board 4580, 4581 & 4583 and the I/O Matrix board
4582 have to have a board address (board no. 0-5) set via jumpers on
the board respectively. On boards of type 4580, 4581 and 4583
jumpers "JP2-JP4" and on board type 4582 jumpers "JP1-JP3", see
Figure 6, page 27. All the board programming is done via EBLWin.
6.1
Expansion board no. (address) setting
The expansion board no. (address) is set via jumpers on the expansion
board respectively.
Board no.
(address)
4580, 4581, 4583 and 4583DE
4582
JP2
JP3
JP4
JP1
JP2
JP3
0
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
1
Shunted
Open
Open
Shunted
Open
Open
2
Open
Shunted
Open
Open
Shunted
Open
3
Shunted
Shunted
Open
Shunted
Shunted
Open
4
Open
Open
Shunted
Open
Open
Shunted
5
Shunted
Open
Shunted
Shunted
Open
Shunted
Figure 6. Expansion boards 4580 - 4583.
expansion board no. (address) setting.
6.2
Jumpers for
8 zones expansion board 4580
Each board has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:

Address / Board no. (set via the jumpers "JP2-JP4", see Figure 6
above.)
The 4580 board has eight conventional zone line inputs (0-7) intended
for conventional detectors. In the last alarm point on each zone line,
has to be connected an end-of-line device, depending on the selected
"Type of zone line input", see below.
Connections to "J1:1-16" and "J2" according to drawing 512 G3 - 33.
Each zone line input has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:







Type of zone line input (see below), depending on detectors / endof-line device (capacitor or resistor), i.e. different threshold levels
etc.
Alarm at short circuit / No alarm at short circuit (i.e. if shortcircuit on the zone line shall generate a fire alarm or a fault)
Zone number (address optional)
Fire alarm delay / No fire alarm delay
Text (Alarm text – if you wish)
Alert annunciation time channel
Disablement time channel
27
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x


Two-unit dependency time channel
Type of detectors connected to the zone line input (see “Fire alarm
type A and Fire alarm type B”, page 126, for an explanation of
(A) and (B))
The terminals support a wire size up to 1.13 mm2 (1.2 mm).
6.2.1
Type of zone line input
Each input shall be selected as Not used or one of the following types
/ modes.
6.2.1.1
Zone line input (EOL capacitor)
This type is normally used. It has the lowest zone line current
consumption since the end-of-line device is a capacitor, 470 nF (±10
%). Max. allowed cable resistance is 50 ohm. Max. allowed cable
capacitance is 50 nF. Total detector current consumption < 1.5 mA.
6.2.1.2
EX zone line input (EOL resistor)
This type shall be used only when units for Hazardous (Ex) areas shall
be connected, i.e. via the Galvanic isolator MTL5061 (2820). The
end-of-line device has to be a resistor, 10K (±5 %) with a body
surface area > 230 mm2 (supplied with the Galvanic isolator). Max.
allowed cable resistance is 40 ohm. Max. allowed cable capacitance is
70 nF. Total detector current consumption < 1.0 mA.
6.2.1.3
Zone line input (EOL resistor)
NOTE! Valid for the Australian and New Zealand conventions only.
This type shall be used only when any of the other types cannot be
used (e.g. for some older type of detectors and not Panasonic
detectors). It has the highest zone line current consumption since the
end-of-line device is a resistor, 4K7 (±5 %). Max. allowed cable
resistance is 50 ohm. Total detector current consumption < 2.0 mA.
6.2.2
Input states
Each input will be in one of six different states.
6.2.2.1
Normal state
The normal zone line input state, i.e. no alarm, no fault, etc. and the
nominal voltage is 24 V DC15. From this state any other state can be
reached / activated.
6.2.2.2
High current state
The max. current consumption limit16 for the zone line input is
exceeded, which is indicating that e.g. too many detectors are
connected. This generates a fault condition in EBL512 G3. From this
15
16
Allowed voltage 15-28 V DC.
This limit is depending on the selected input mode.
28
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
state any other state can be reached / activated except the open circuit
state.
6.2.2.3
Alarm state
One alarm point (or more) on the zone line is in alarm state and the
alarm limit16 for the zone line is exceeded. This activates a fire alarm
in EBL512 G3. In this state short-circuit, open circuit, high current
and low voltage states cannot be reached / activated. After alarm reset
(in EBL512 G3) the zone line input will return to the normal state.
6.2.2.4
Short-circuit state
The short-circuit current limit16 is exceeded, indicating short-circuit on
the zone line. This normally generates a fault condition in EBL512
G3 but instead a fire alarm can be activated, if this option is selected
via EBLWin.
6.2.2.5
Open circuit state
The open circuit current limit16 is passed, indicating no or too low
zone line current consumption, i.e. the end-of-line device is not
detected. This generates a fault condition in EBL512 G3. From this
state any other state can be reached / activated.
6.2.2.6
Disconnected state
Via menu H8/S1 (Disconnect loop / zone line input) the zone line
input can be disconnected17, i.e. there is no voltage on the zone line.
From this state no other state can be reached / activated.
6.3
8 relays expansion board 4581
Each board has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:

Address / Board no. (set via the jumpers "JP2-JP4", see Figure 6,
page 27.
The 4581 board has eight programmable relay outputs (Output 0-7).
Connections to "J1:1-16" and "J2" according to drawing 512 G3 - 34.
Each output has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:




Type of output, i.e. output for Control, Alarm devices, etc.
Activation time and type / output signal period (steady, pulse,
delay, etc.)
Logic, i.e. normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)
contacts18
Control expression (one or more trigger conditions)
For more information, see chapter "Programmable outputs", page 80.
The terminals support a wire size up to 1.13 mm2 (1.2 mm).
17
This is indicated in EBL512 G3 by the LED Fault / Disablements
"General disablements".
18
Relay contact ratings: Max. 2A @ 30 V DC.
29
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
6.4
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Inputs and outputs expansion board 4583
NOTE! If more than two 4583/4583DE boards are used, care must be
taken not to overload the fuse on the main board (fuse F13).
Each board has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:

Address / Board no. (set via the jumpers "JP2-JP4", see Figure 6,
page 27.
The I/O expansion board 4583 has two programmable supervised / not
supervised voltage outputs (Output 0-1), one special / programmable
output (Output 2) intended for German extinguishing system and five
programmable supervised / not supervised inputs (Input 0-4).
Connections to "J1:1-16" and "J2" and line resistances according to
drawing 512 G3 – 35, sheet 1 and sheet 2.
Outputs 0-1 have to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:
 Type of output, i.e. output for Control, Alarm devices, etc.
 Activation time and type / output signal period (steady, pulse,
delay, etc.)
 Supervised / Not supervised19
 Logic, i.e. normally low (default) or normally high (24 V DC)20.
 Control expression (one or more trigger conditions)
One to five 33K resistors can be connected. When the connections are
finished, a calibration has to be done. Calibration value has to be in
the range 4K7-50K. See also the EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions
MEW01777 chapter "Calibration of supervised outputs (menu
H5/A1)".
Voltage Output 0 (J1:1-2): Max. 200 mA (Fuse F1).
Voltage Output 1 (J1:5-6): Max. 200 mA (Fuse F2).
See also chapter "Programmable outputs", page 80.
Output 2 has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:
 Type of output, i.e. output for Control, Alarm devices, etc.
 Activation time and type / output signal period (steady, pulse,
delay, etc.)
 Logic, i.e. normally high resistance (default) or normally low.
 Control expression (one or more trigger conditions)
Output 2 (J1:11-12): Normally open or Normally closed.
See also chapter "Programmable outputs", page 80.
Inputs 0-4 have to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:
 Trigger condition (Triggered by)
19
A normally high output cannot be supervised. The supervision voltage is
1.5 – 3.6 V DC (depending on the number of supervision resistors) and the
polarity is reverse compared to an activated output.
20
Regarding the system voltage, see chapter "Power supply", page 185.
30
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
 Supervised / Not supervised
 Logic, i.e. Normally open (high resistance, 3K3, when supervised)
or Normally closed (low resistance, 680R, when supervised)
 Additional information depending on the selected type
Input 0 (J1:3-4)
Input 1 (J1:7-8)
Input 2 (J1:9-10)
Input 3 (J1:13-14)
Input 4 (J1:15-16)
See also chapter "Programmable inputs", page 72.
6.5
Inputs and outputs expansion board
4583DE
NOTE! If more than two 4583/4583DE boards are used, care must be
taken not to overload the fuse on the main board (fuse F13).
This board is made for connection of the following German units:
- Fire alarm routing equipment
- Key cabinet
- Extinguishing equipment
Each board has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:

Address / Board no. (set via the jumpers "JP2-JP4", see Figure 6,
page 27).
The I/O expansion board 4583DE has two programmable supervised /
not supervised voltage outputs (Output 0-1), one special /
programmable output (Output 2) intended for German extinguishing
system and five programmable supervised / not supervised inputs
(Input 0-4).
Connections to "J1:1-16" and "J2" and line resistances according to
drawing 512 G3 – 35, sheet 2 and sheet 3.
Outputs 0-1 have to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:
 Type of output, i.e. output for Control, Alarm devices, etc.
 Activation time and type / output signal period (steady, pulse,
delay, etc.)
 Supervised / Not supervised
 Logic, i.e. normally low (default) or normally high (24 V DC)21.
 Control expression (one or more trigger conditions)
One resistor (200-1000 ohm) can be connected as end-of-line device.
Voltage Output 0 (J1:1-2): Max. 200 mA (Fuse F1). Intended for
German fire alarm routing equipment, fire alarm.
("E"
Brandmeldung). Supervision voltage 2.1 V DC, same polarity as
when activated.
21
20.4 – 24 V DC.
31
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Voltage Output 1 (J1:5-6): Max. 200 mA (Fuse F2). Intended for
German fire alarm routing equipment, fire alarm.
("E"
Brandmeldung). Supervision voltage 2.1 V DC, same polarity as
when activated.
See also chapter "Programmable outputs", page 80.
Output 2 has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:
 Type of output, i.e. output for Control, Alarm devices, etc.
 Activation time and type / output signal period (steady, pulse,
delay, etc.)
 Logic, i.e. normally high resistance (default) or normally low.
 Control expression (one or more trigger conditions)
Output 2 (J1:11-12): Normally open (high resistance, 3K3, when
supervised) or Normally closed (low resistance, 680R, when
supervised). Used for German extinguishing system (Löschanlage).
See also chapter "Programmable outputs", page 80.
Inputs 0-1, 3-4 have to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:
 Trigger condition (Triggered by)
 Supervised / Not supervised
 Logic, i.e. Normally open (high resistance, 3K3, when supervised)
or Normally closed (low resistance, 680R, when supervised)
 Additional information depending on the selected type
Input 0 (J1:3-4): Intended for German Fire alarm routing equipment
feedback
Input 1 (J1:7-8): Intended for German Fire alarm routing equipment
feedback
Input 3 (J1:13-14): Used for German extinguishing system (Löschanlage ausgelöst)
Input 4 (J1:15-16): Used for German extinguishing system (Löschanlage quittung)
See also chapter "Programmable inputs", page 72.
Input 2 (J1:9-10) is a special input. It can only be used for connection
of the sabotage line from a German key cabinet (FSD Überwachung).
The supervision and activation of this input fulfills the requirement of
key cabinet class SD3 as specified by chapter 10.5 in “VdS 2105 :
2013-10 (05)”. The supervision resistor should be 2K2.
Input 2 have to be programmed via EBLWin:
 Trigger condition – Should be set to ‘External fault’
 Supervised / Not supervised – Should be set to Supervised
 Logic, i.e. Normally open or Normally closed – Should be set to
Normally closed
 Fault text: ‘FAULT: Key cabinet, control unit XX’
See also chapter "Programmable inputs", page 72.
32
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
6.6
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
I/O Matrix board 4582
A special type of expansion board that only can be used together with
an Application board (e.g. Fan, Generic or Zone), see pages 26 and
62. The I/O Matrix board makes it possible for any retailer to
manufacture and connect three different types of "Application boards"
to EBL512 G3 via the COM loop.
C.i.e
EBL512 G3
.
COM loop
24 V DC
Type:
Application
boards:
Fan control
Fan
Generic
Zone
I/O
Matrix
board
4582
I/O
Matrix
board
4582
I/O
Matrix
board
4582
Generic
No. 0
4 Fans
Zone control
No. 1
Mimic panel / New Zealand i.p.
No. 3
Zone c.i.p.
Figure 7. I/O Matrix board application overview. The COM
loop and 24 V DC are internally connected to the I/O Matrix
board.
The I/O Matrix board (80 x 63 mm) is plugged to the Application
board respectively ("piggy back" connection) and has 16 switch inputs
and 48 LED outputs. The COM loop and 24 V DC is connected to the
Application board (and internally connected to the I/O Matrix board).
Three different application board types can be selected via jumpers
(JP4-JP5) on the I/O Matrix board:
Generic control and indicating panel (Mimic panel alt. New
Zealand indication panel), with 16 inputs (any input trigger
condition can be used) and 48 outputs (any output trigger condition
can be used).
Fan control and indicating panel, for four Fan control panels, each
with six LEDs (On / Auto / Off / Running / Stopped / Fault) and
three push buttons (On / Auto / Off). One "Reset" switch.
Simple or Advanced function for a "Supply air fan" or a "Standard
fan". Enhanced function for a "Smoke exhaust", "Smoke spill",
"Stair pressurisation" or a "Supply air" fan.
This type is used with the "Fan control application board" 4594,
which is used with the "Fan control panel 4593, see page 62.
Zone control and indicating panel, with outputs and inputs for 16
zone LEDs (Alarm / Fault / Disabled) and 16 push buttons
(Disable).
For the number and type of boards that can be used, see page 26.
33
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
There is no COM loop address to be set. Instead, the expansion
board no. / address (0-7) is set with jumpers (JP1-JP3) on the I/O
Matrix board respectively. See Figure 6, page 27.
In EBL512 G3 can totally up to 512 outputs be used, including all
kinds of outputs.
For more information (e.g. application board type selected via jumpers
JP4-JP5), see the I/O Matrix board 4582, Technical description
MEW00914.
Each I/O Matrix board has to be added via EBLWin
....and programmed regarding:



Address (shall be the same board no. as set via jumpers "JP1JP3"), see Figure 6, page 27.
Name (I/O Matrix Board # - normally not changed)
LED test on Input 15 (selected or not selected)
The 4582 board has 48 LED outputs and 16 switch inputs (0-15).
Depending on the type (Generic, Fan or Zone), the outputs and inputs
are programmed differently.
Available application board (fan control), see page 62.
6.6.1
Generic
Used for Application board type Generic, e.g. "General I/O
application board" 4596 (see page 62).
Each output (0-47) has to be added and programmed via EBLWin
regarding:


Output no. (0-47)
Properties, like any programmable relay output.
Each input (0-15) has to be added and programmed via EBLWin
regarding:



6.6.2
Input no. (0-15)
Type (of input)
Properties, like any programmable input.
Fan control
Used for Application board type Fan control, e.g. "Fan control
application board" 4594, which has a front for control of four fans.
34
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Fan control panel 4593 has two Fan control application boards 4594
and two Fan control fronts (see page 62). See also Technical
Description Fan control panel 4593 (MEW01245).
Each Fan (0-3) (i.e. each Fan control) has to be added and
programmed via EBLWin.
For each fan, also one I/O unit 3361 is required. It has to be added in
EBLWin as an I/O unit for fan control 3361 and programmed
regarding e.g:





6.6.3
Technical address (COM loop address 1-255)
Name (Fan control I/O unit - normally not changed)
Fan control information
 I/O Matrix fan control (Fan control / fan 0-3)
 Supervised or not supervised (Input In0)
 Output latched or not latched
 Enhanced fan control function or not.22
 Fault detection time (Input In0; 30-255 seconds)
Properties (for Re0)22, like any programmable output.
Normally stopped or Normally running
Zone control
Used for Application board type Zone control. 23
Each input (0-15) has to be programmed via EBLWin regarding:

Zone (control) no. (0-15)
22
If Re0 is normally open, Re1 will automatically be normally closed and
vice verse. If "Enhanced fan control function" is selected an Re1 tab will be
available for individual programming of Re1.
23
Zone control is normally used on the Australian market only.
35
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
7
Printer
7.1
EBL512 G3
The EBL512 G3 control unit type 5000 is delivered with or without a
printer depending on if "PRN" is added in the article number or not. It
is mounted on the front panel door and is connected to the MMI board
5011. See drawing 512 G3 – 01, sheet 2/2.
When the printer is mounted, the checkbox "Printer" has to be marked
in the EBLWin "Control unit properties" dialog box.
Alarms (Fire alarms – incl. test mode alarms & Heavy smoke / heat
alarms, etc.) will always be printed. The following can be printed:






Faults via menu H6
Disablements, etc. via menus H4/U1 – U2
Detectors activating service signal via menu H4/U5
The event logs via menu H4/U7
The control unit information / configuration via menu H4/U8
Activated Interlocking inputs via menu H9/C1
The printer only – not the mounting frame and connection cable – is
available as a spare part, type number 5058.
7.2
Ext. Fire Brigade Panel 1826
A printer 1835 can, as an option, be mounted in the ext. FBP 1826.
Alarms (Fire alarms – incl. Heavy smoke / heat alarms, etc.) will be
printed but only if the door is open / opened while the alarms are
activated.
36
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
8
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
TLON connection board 5090
TLON connection board 1590 is replaced by 5090.
On the EBL512 G3 control unit (5000 / 5001) main board (5010),
there are spaces and connectors for two TLON connection boards type
5090. In a single (standalone) control unit there shall be no TLON
connection board mounted.
A system, with two or more control units, uses a single TLON
Network or a redundant TLON Network, see below.
The TLON connection boards are mounted on the main board (5010)
according to dwg. 512 G3 – 11 and the networks are connected to the
terminal block "J4" on main board according to dwg 512 G3 - 24.
8.1
Single TLON Network
In a single TLON Network (Network no. 0), the TLON connection
board (5090) shall be mounted in position no. 0 on the main board. A
single TLON Network is a violation to the EN54-13 standard.
8.2
Redundant TLON network
In a redundant TLON Network (Network no. 0 and no. 1), the TLON
connection boards (5090) shall be mounted in position no. 0 and
position no. 1 on the main board.
Normally only Network no. 0 will be in use and in case of a network
fault (i.e. open circuit or short circuit), Network no. 1 will be
automatically used until there is no fault on Network no. 0.
See also chapter "Control Unit / TLON Network", page 18.
8.3
Network programming
The PC program TLON Manager is used for the TLON Network
programming. TLON Manager V1.X is replaced by TLON
Manager V2.0.x.
In a redundant network two Projects have to be created and installed.
The Projects have to be identical but with different Project names.
One has to be installed for Network no. 0 and one installed for
Network no. 1.
NOTE! By the TLON Network programming (installation), some
data will be stored in a TLON connection board (5090) memory and
some data will be stored in a main board (5010) memory.
After replacing a TLON connection board to another (or replacing
both a TLON connection board and a main board), do "Replace" and
"Update" in TLON Manager 2.0. (In TLON Manager 1.2 also
"Save".)
After replacing a main board to another (i.e. not the TLON connection
board), do "Update" in TLON Manager 2.0. (In TLON Manager 1.2
also "Save".)
37
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
9
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Peripheral devices
Alarm points. Analog alarm points (detectors, etc.) are connected
directly to a COM loop. Conventional alarm points (detectors, etc.)
are connected to an 8 zones expansion board (4580) zone line input or
a COM loop unit (e.g. 3361) zone line input. Programmable inputs
can also be used for flow switches etc.
Short circuit isolators can be used on the COM loops.
Sounders, door release magnets, etc. are connected to COM loop unit
(e.g. 3361 / 3364) outputs and/or control unit outputs (S0-S3, R0-R1)
and/or 8 relays expansion board (4581) outputs. Addressable
sounders (4477 / 3379) are connected directly to a COM loop.
Input devices as key cabinet, timers, external faults, etc. are connected
to a programmable input, i.e. to COM loop unit (e.g. 3361) inputs
and/or to the control unit inputs (I0-I3).
Routing equipment is normally connected to the control unit outputs
"Fire alarm" (for Fire brigade tx) and "Fault condition" (for Fault tx).
(Any programmable output can also be used).
External Fire Brigade Panels and External Displays Units are
connected directly to the RS485 channel.
As an alternative the RS485 channel can be used for:
German Fire Brigade Control Panel (FBF) and German Fire Brigade
Indicator Panel (FAT).24
More information, see the Product Leaflet for the device respectively.
9.1
COM loop units
Each COM loop (0-3) can handle up to 255 addressable COM loop
units, i.e. in total up to 1020 COM loop units. Max. 512 (of the 1020)
can be alarm points. Depending on the type of units and the number
of units the total current consumption will vary and this will affect the
cable length. See chapters "COM loop cable length", page 180,
"Current consumption", page 183 and dwg 512 G3 - 41.
NOTE! The control unit can be configured for up to 128, 256 or 512
alarm points. Normally this is factory set but can be upgraded on site
(via EBLWin)25. In menu H4/U8 is the current configuration shown.
The units should be distributed as even as possible on each COM loop
and between the COM loops (0, 1, 2 & 3).
Remember: Up to 1020 COM loop addresses can always be used
but max. 512 of these can be alarm points, according to EN54-2.
24
If German panels are connected to the RS485 channel, no other units
can be connected to the RS485 channel.
25
This action require a special download password.
38
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The following units can be connected to the COM loops (some units
can be used in different modes):
NOTE!
4301 in NORMAL mode = 3304 in NORMAL mode.
4300 in NORMAL mode = 3316 in NORMAL mode.
3361 The I/O Unit for Fan control is used with
the Fan control panel
4593 only.
Customized units (listed below)
NOTE!
The Customized I/O 1 (1=Exit light.) is not found
in Panasonic's product range.
Customized I/O 1
Obsolete loop units (listed below) can be found in old installations
and can be used in EBL512 G3 installations as well.
39
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
NOTE!
2300 & 2304 plugged in base 2312.
2304 = 4301 & 3304 in 2312 mode, plugged in base 3312xx.
3333/3339 is also used for 4433/4439 when the built-in short circuit
isolator shall not be used.
3377 is also used for 4477 when the built-in short circuit isolator shall
not be used.
AAFC The Alarm Acknowledge Facility Control is used on the
Australian market only.
NOTE! When one or more of the shaded units above are used on a
COM loop, the maximum number of loop units is 127, i.e. only
technical address 1-127 can be used.
Address setting
Each COM loop unit has to have a unique COM loop address (001255). This address and the mode are set with the Address Setting
Tool (3314 / 4414). The mode to use is for each unit described in the
following chapters.
9.1.1
Input units
Each COM loop input unit is added and programmed via EBLWin.
Depending on type of unit, regarding:






Technical address (COM loop address) 001-255
Name (normally not changed)
Zone number and Address within the zone
Alarm text (user definable)
Regular Alarm algorithm (some units only)
Options:
 Alternative Alarm algorithm & Time Channel (some units only)
 Alert annunciation & Time Channel (some units only)
 Disablement & Time Channel (some units only)
 Two-units-dependent fire alarm, i.e. co-incidence alarm & Time
Channel (some units only)
 Delayed (fire alarm)
 Quiet alarm (Australian function)
40
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Figure 8. An example of an EBLWin dialog box.
Connections, if nothing else is specified, see drawing 512 G3 - 31.
9.1.1.1
Analog Sensor Bases (ASB)
An analog detector (Sensor) shall be plugged in an analog base. The
COM loop address is set in the detector, see below.
3312 Analog Base.26 3312 has screw terminals for the COM loop
and an ext. LED (2218). Prepared for mechanical lock of the
detector - if required. Recess for label holder (3391). The base
has an address label on which the COM loop address for the
detector to be plugged in the base can be written.
3313 Analog Base. Like 3312 but instead of screw terminals for the
3312FL
COM loop and an ext. LED this base has fast connectors (blue
and grey respectively.
3314 Analog Base. Like 3312FL but no connector (grey) for an ext.
3312F
LED.
4313 Analog Base with isolator. An analog detector (Sensor) is to be
plugged in 4313. Terminals for an ext. LED (2218). Prepared
for mechanical lock of the detector - if required. Recess for
label holder (3391). It has also a built-in short circuit isolator
(see page 57). The isolator's COM loop address is set with the
Address setting tool (3314 / 4414). The base has an address
label on which the COM loop address for the detector to be
26
This base will be replaced by 3312FL and 3312F.
41
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
plugged in the base can be written as well as the isolator's COM
loop address.
The Address setting tool (3314 / 4414) is also used for mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 4313 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
9.1.1.2
Addressable Manual Call Points
3333 Addressable Manual Call Point.27 3333 conforms to EN54-11.
A built-in LED will indicate that fire alarm is generated, i.e. the
glass is broken. Routine testing can be performed with a
supplied test key, without breaking the glass. A hinged
polycarbonate flap is protecting the glass. The COM loop
address is set with the Address setting tool (3314 / 4414).
3333 is to be surface mounted in the supplied red back box or
flush mounted on a Swedish 65mm circular mounting box.
For indoor use and in dry premises.
The Address setting tool (3314 / 4414) is also used for mode
setting. 3333 is replaced by 4433.
NORMAL mode: Flashing or not flashing LED (see Product
leaflet MEW00097) is set via EBLWin.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
3339 Enclosed Addressable Manual Call Point.27 3339 is like the
3333 unit but with another type of back-box (incl. a tightening
gasket). For surface mounting. For indoor use in premises
where IP56 rating is required. Operating temp. -10 to +55°C.
Modes like for type 3333. 3339 is replaced by 4439.
4433 Addressable Manual Call Point with isolator. 4433 is like the
3333 unit but it also has a built-in short circuit isolator (see
page 57), which does not use any separate COM loop address.
4433 has replaced 3333.
NORMAL mode: In this mode the isolator is in use.
Programmed in EBLWin as m.c.p. type 4433. Flashing or not
flashing LED is set via EBLWin.
2330 mode: In this mode the isolator is not in use.
Programmed in EBLWin as m.c.p. type 3333. Flashing or not
flashing LED is set via EBLWin.
2312 mode: In this mode the isolator is not in use.
Programmed in EBLWin as m.c.p. type 2333. Flashing LED.
4439 Enclosed Addressable Manual Call Point with isolator. 4439 is
like the 3339 unit but it also has a built-in short circuit isolator
27
The manual call points have a response time < 5 s.
42
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
(see page 57), which does not use any separate COM loop
address. 4439 has replaced 3339. Modes like for type 4433.
9.1.1.3
Analog Detectors
3308 Analog heat detector. 3308 shall be plugged in an analog base
(3312 / 3312F / 3312FL / 3379 / 4313). Built-in LED that is lit
to indicate that the detector has activated a fire alarm. Prepared
for mechanical lock (screw attached) – if required. The COM
loop address is set with the Address setting tool (3314 / 4414).
The detector has an address label on which the programmed
COM loop address can be written.
The Address setting tool (3314 / 4414) is also used for mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: 3308 is in this mode via EBLWin set to one
of three algorithms (static response temp. range) for class:
A1 (54-65°C), min./typical/max. ambient temp. -20/+25/+50°C
A2 S (54-70°C), min./typical/max. ambient temp. -20/+25/+50°C
B S (69-85°C), min./typical/max. ambient temp. -20/+40/+65°C
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
3309 Analog heat detector. Enclosed (IP67)28. Built-in LED that is
lit to indicate that the detector has generated fire alarm.
Terminals for an ext. LED (2218). Recess for label holder
(3391). The COM loop address is set with the Address setting
tool (3314 / 4414). The Address setting tool 3314 / 4414 is also
used for mode setting:
NORMAL mode: 3309 is in this mode via EBLWin set to one
of three algorithms (static response temp. range) for class:
A1 (54-65°C), min./typical/max. ambient temp. -20/+25/+50°C
A2 S (54-70°C), min./typical/max. ambient temp. -20/+25/+50°C
B S (69-85°C), min./typical/max. ambient temp. -20/+40/+65°C
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
4300 Analog multi detector.29 4300 is a smoke detector and a heat
detector within one housing. Scattered light (i.e. reflection of
infrared light) is used to detect smoke and the heat sensing
element is a thermistor. The detector unit (actually the heat
detector) can detect a methylated spirits (alcohol) fire (EN54-9,
test fire TF6; liquid fire), which normally is impossible for a
photo electric smoke detector to detect.
The detector has unleaded soldering.
Shall be plugged in an analog base (3312 / 3312F / 3312FL /
3379 / 4313). Built-in LEDs are lit to indicate that the
28
This detector holds the ATEX classification:
Ex II 3GD EEx nA II T5 (T 70°C), -20°C < Ta < 65°C.
29
4300 is replaced by 4400 (in NORMAL mode).
43
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
detector30 has activated a fire alarm. Prepared for mechanical
lock (screw attached) – if required.
Via EBLWin, it is set how the detector shall operate:
Zone-Addr.
001-01 (smoke)
001-02 (heat)
COM loop address
e.g. 123
a)
Two presentation numbers (addresses): The detector
unit works as two separate detectors. The smoke detector is
programmed for one zone-address and the heat detector for
another zone-address31. (Can be used to disable e.g. the smoke
detector during working hours and/or in control expressions for
programmable outputs).
b)
One presentation number (address): The detector unit
works as one detector and is programmed for one zone-address.
Zone-Addr.
001-01 (smoke
or heat)
COM loop address
e.g. 123
The sensitivity is
depending on the
temp.
20°C => 3.8 %/m
↓
↓
40°C => 1.8 %/m
30
Via EBLWin is set if the detectors in alt. b) shall work with
"OR-functionality" or with a "Decision algorithm":
b1) OR-functionality: Either the heat detector or the
smoke detector will activate fire alarm. This alternative is
recommended in most cases.
b2) Decision algorithm:
Fire alarm will be activated if:
temperature (°C) + adjusted smoke value 32 > 58.
Pre-warning will be activated if:
58 > temperature (°C) + adjusted smoke value32 > 50.
The "Decision algorithm" 33, see Figure 9, can be used to
reduce so called false alarms (nuisance alarms), because at
a normal room temperature, more smoke is required to
activate fire alarm than when the room temperature is high
(or is rising). By a real fire, the room temperature will rise
rather fast and less and less smoke is required to activate
fire alarm. Very little smoke require a "high" temperature
to activate fire alarm and very much smoke will activate
fire alarm also at a "low" temperature.
I.e. the heat detector and/or the smoke detektor.
31
The zone number has to be the same for both detectors. NOTE! When
counting alarm points these "two detectors" are regarded as two alarm points.
32
Adjusted smoke value = obscuration (%/m) x 10. Default heat alarm
levels (50°C / 58°C) and smoke alarm offsets (50 / 58) can be changed via
EBLWin. The temp. can not be lower than 0°C in the algorithm / graph.
33
The decision algorithm is a violation to the EN54-7 standard.
44
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
70
Temperature
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
Smoke value
Figure 9. When the calculated value in the decision algorithm
exceeds the lower graph, pre-warning will be activated. When it
exceeds the upper graph, fire alarm will be activated.
Temperature = °C. Smoke value = obscuration (%/m) x 10.
The Analog multi detector's COM loop address (Technical
address) is set with the Address setting tool (3314 / 4414). The
detector has an address label on which the programmed
technical address can be written.
NOTE!
The multi detector 4300 in system EBL512 G3 takes two COM
loop (technical) addresses of the available 255. One address
that is set with the 3314 / 4414 tool but also one more address
will be "occupied" for the heat part of the detector. 34
The Address setting tool 3314 / 4414 is also used for mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: 4300 in this mode is in EBLWin, for the
smoke detector, set to one of six algorithms H-15, H-35, L-15,
L-35, N-15 or N-35 and for the heat detector set to one of three
algorithms for class A1 (static response temp. 54-65°C), A2 S
(54-70°C) or B S (69-85°C).
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
4301 Analog photo electric smoke detector.35 Scattered light (i.e.
reflection of infrared light) is used to detect smoke.
The detector has unleaded soldering.
Shall be plugged in an analog base (3312 / 3312F / 3312FL /
3379 / 4313). Built-in LEDs are lit to indicate that the detector
has activated fire alarm. Prepared for mechanical lock (screw
34
The extra address is automatically assigned by EBLWin in conjunction
with the SSD download and is not visible to the user.
35
4301 is replaced by 4401 (in NORMAL mode).
45
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
attached) – if required.
The COM loop address is set with the Address setting tool
(3314 / 4414). The detector has an address label on which the
programmed COM loop address can be written.
The Address setting tool (3314 / 4414) is also used for mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: 4301 in this mode is in EBLWin set to one
of the six algorithms H-15, H-35, L-15, L-35, N-15
or N-35.
2330 mode: 4301 in this mode will work as a 2330 + 2321.
2312 mode: 4301 in this mode will work as the obsolete
Analog photo electric smoke detector 2304.
4400 Analog multi detector. 4400 is a smoke detector and a heat
detector in one housing. Scattered light (i.e. reflection of
infrared light) is used to detect smoke and the heat sensing
element is a thermistor. The detector has unleaded soldering.
Shall be plugged in an analog base (3312 / 3312F / 3312FL /
3379 / 4313). Built-in LEDs (red) are blinking to indicate that
the detector36 has activated a fire alarm. Prepared for
mechanical lock (screw attached) – if required. 4400 has a
little different design than the 4300 detector and the smoke
chamber net has even smaller holes. This will keep insects and
particles37 larger than smoke particles out of the chamber.
The Analog multi detector 4400 COM loop address (Technical
address) is set with the Address setting tool (3314 / 4414). The
detector has an address label on which the programmed
technical address can be written. The Address setting tool 3314
/ 4414 is also used for mode setting:
Advanced mode: 4400 has to be set to Advanced mode via the
Address setting tool 4414. Note, the Address setting tool 3314
cannot be used to set Advanced mode! In Advanced mode this
detector will use algorithms in the detector for fire alarm
evaluation. It can be set to a Learning function or via EBLWin
to one of five area algorithms (Normal, Clean, Smoke/Steam,
Cooking/Welding or Heater area), see chapter "Advanced
mode", page 138. An alternative smoke and/or heat algorithm
can be used via one or two time channels. 4400 has a green
polling LED. Via EBLWin is set if the green polling LED shall
blink when the detector is polled or never blink. Note, the LED
will not be blinking if the detector is in Test mode.
In Advanced mode only one COM loop address will be
occupied for the multi detector.
NORMAL mode: 4400 in this mode has to be programmed in
EBLWin as a 4300 detector, i.e. the 4400 detector will work as
36
I.e. the heat detector and/or the smoke detektor.
37
For example dust, steam, etc.
46
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
and replace the Analog multi detector 4300 (see 4300 above)
and two COM loop addresses will be occupied, see 4300 above.
The smoke detector part has to be set to one of six algorithms
H-15, H-35, L-15, L-35, N-15 or N-35 and the heat detector
part has to be set to one of three algorithms for class A1 (static
response temp. 54-65°C), A2 S (54-70°C) or B S (69-85°C).
An alternative smoke and/or heat algorithm can be used via one
or two time channels.
2330 mode: 4400 in this mode will work as a 2330 + 2316/17.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
4401 Analog photo electric smoke detector. Scattered light (i.e.
reflection of infrared light) is used to detect smoke. The
detector has unleaded soldering. Shall be plugged in an analog
base (3312 / 3312F / 3312FL / 3379 / 4313). Built-in LEDs
(red) are blinking to indicate that the detector has activated fire
alarm. Prepared for mechanical lock (screw attached) – if
required. 4401 has a little different design than the 4301
detector and the smoke chamber net has even smaller holes.
This will keep insects and particles37 larger than smoke particles
out of the chamber.
The Analog photo electric smoke detector 4401 COM loop
address (Technical address) is set with the Address setting tool
(3314 / 4414). The detector has an address label on which the
programmed technical address can be written. The Address
setting tool 3314 / 4414 is also used for mode setting:
Advanced mode: 4401 has to be set to Advanced mode via the
Address setting tool 4414. Note, the Address setting tool 3314
cannot be used to set Advanced mode! In Advanced mode this
detector will use algorithms in the detector for fire alarm
evaluation. It can be set to a Learning function or via EBLWin
to one of three area algorithms (Normal, Clean or Smoke/Steam
area), see chapter "Advanced mode", page 138. An alternative
algorithm can be used via a time channel. 4401 has a green
polling LED. Via EBLWin is set if the green polling LED shall
blink when the detector is polled or never blink. Note, the LED
will not be blinking if the detector is in Test mode.
NORMAL mode: 4401 in this mode has to be programmed in
EBLWin as a 4301 detector, i.e. the 4401 detector will work as
and replace the Analog photoelectric smoke detector 4301 (see
4301 above) and has to be set to one of six algorithms H-15, H35, L-15, L-35, N-15 or N-35. An alternative algorithm can be
used via a time channel.
2330 mode: 4401 in this mode will work as a 2330 + 2321.
2312 mode: 4401 in this mode will work as the obsolete
Analog photo electric smoke detector 2304.
4402 Analog multi detector with CO. 4402 is a smoke, heat and CO
detector in one housing. Scattered light (i.e. reflection of
infrared light) is used to detect smoke and the heat sensing
47
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
element is a thermistor. The CO sensor is of chemical type,
with an approx. life time of 5 years (service signal after 60
months). For a smoke density rise > 2.5 %/m/min. also a rise of
CO density is required for activation of fire alarm. This will
secure real fire alarms and minimize the not wanted nuisance
alarms, e.g. due to artificial smoke, etc. The detector has
unleaded soldering.
Shall be plugged in an analog base (3312 / 3312F / 3312FL /
3379 / 4313). Built-in LEDs (red) are blinking to indicate that
the detector has activated a fire alarm. 4402 also has a green
polling LED. Via EBLWin is set if the green polling LED shall
blink when the detector is polled or never blink. Note, the LED
will not be blinking if the detector is in Test mode. Prepared
for mechanical lock (screw attached) – if required. .
The Analog multi detector with CO 4402 COM loop address
(Technical address) is set with the Address setting tool (3314 /
4414). The detector has an address label on which the
programmed technical address can be written. The Address
setting tool 3314 / 4414 is also used for mode setting:
Advanced mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
NORMAL mode: 4402 in this mode can be used in system
EBL512 G3 version > 2.1.x.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
4611 Wireless smoke detector. The detector is plugged in a supplied
base. The smoke detection chamber contains an IR LED and a
photodiode. Reflection of infrared light is used to detect
smoke. The smoke enters the detection chamber through an
insect filter and an optical labyrinth. In order to reduce false
(nuisance) alarms, fire alarm will not be activated until after
three values over the alarm threshold level. The detector has
sensitivity compensation for contamination. A built-in sounder
with three different sound types can be activated in case of fire
alarm. The detector has one external antenna. The detector has
an LED for fire alarm indication. The Wireless smoke detector
is power supplied by two pieces of a 3 V Lithium 1600 mAh
battery (incl. connection cables). The battery life time is
typically six years. Up to 16 Wireless smoke detectors can
communicate with a Base station (4620). Each Wireless smoke
detector takes one COM loop address. Transmission distance
between a detector and its Base station is min. 40 m in open air.
4613 Wireless sniffer. As a help during planning, installation and
commissioning, a Wireless sniffer, i.e. a USB device with
antenna and a PC program, can be used to check if the signals
between a Base station and all its wireless units are proper or
not. Also the background noise can be checked. It is highly
recommended to do a check on site prior to the installation.
48
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
4620 Addressable Base station for wireless units. The Base station
has two built-in antennas and communicates every two minutes
with up to 16 Wireless smoke detectors (4611) on a pre-set
channel. The Base station takes one COM loop address and it
has a built-in short circuit isolator that requires no separate
COM loop address.
9.1.1.4
Addressable detectors
For the aspirating Aspect smoke detectors below the following
is valid: Commissioning, service, status reading, configuration
changes, etc. can be done on the unit respectively or via a smart
phone app. (A secured wireless network via a Wi-Fi module in
the detector cabinet).
AE2010 N-P Addressable aspirating smoke detector Aspect NITRO. The
detector consists of a cabinet with a built-in fan, filters and two
chambers for smoke detection. Naturally occurring gases,
particles and condensation are separated from fire gases and
smoke before detection takes place. The Nitro sensor employs
the electrical properties of nitrogen. The sensor monitors
changes in the nitrogen on an atomic level and is unaffected by
dust. Even in corrosive environments with extreme amounts of
airborne dust with dimensions almost like smoke particles,
smoke and fire gases can be reliably detected. The Nitro sensor
is highly sensitive during fires in all types of materials, except
pure PVC fires. The detector is made for two separate detection
areas. Up to 2 x 100 m pipeline per area. The detector is
connected on a COM loop and it takes one COM loop address.
It has to be connected to 230 V AC and has a built-in backup
battery. The detector is very easy to install. External mounting
flanges simplify mounting on the wall, and hinged covers
provide simple access to connection terminals and filters. A
number of accessories are available.
The Address setting tool 3314 / 4414 is used for address and
mode settings:
Advanced mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
NORMAL mode: AE2010 N-P in this mode can be used in
system EBL512 G3 version > 2.1.x.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
AE2010 G-P Addressable aspirating smoke detector Aspect GRIZZLE. The
detector consists of a cabinet with a built-in fan, filters and two
chambers for smoke detection. Naturally occurring gases,
particles and condensation are separated from fire gases and
smoke before detection takes place. The Grizzle sensor
separates dust from smoke through an advanced air analysis.
This provides reliable detection of visible smoke, even in
corrosive environments with extreme amounts of airborne dust
with dimensions almost like smoke particles. The Grizzle
sensor accepts gases that normally occur in the detection zones
without giving unwanted alarms. The detector is made for two
separate detection areas. Up to 2 x 100 m pipeline per area.
49
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The detector is connected on a COM loop and it takes one COM
loop address. It has to be connected to 230 V AC and has a
built-in backup battery. The detector is very easy to install.
External mounting flanges simplify mounting on the wall, and
hinged covers provide simple access to connection terminals
and filters. A number of accessories are available.
The Address setting tool 3314 / 4414 is used for address and
mode settings:
Advanced mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
NORMAL mode: AE2010 G-P in this mode can be used in
system EBL512 G3 version > 2.1.x.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
AE2010 L-P Addressable aspirating smoke detector Aspect LAZEER. The
detector consists of a cabinet with a built-in fan, filters and two
chambers ("Nitro" & "Grizzle") for smoke detection. Naturally
occurring gases, particles and condensation are separated from
fire gases and smoke before detection takes place. The Lazeer
detector has been developed for early warning in clean rooms
with high demands to quick detection of smoke and fire gases.
The detector is made for one detection area. Up to 2 x 100 m
pipeline. The detector is connected on a COM loop and it takes
one COM loop address. It has to be connected to 230 V AC
and has a built-in backup battery. The detector is very easy to
install. External mounting flanges simplify mounting on the
wall, and hinged covers provide simple access to connection
terminals and filters. A number of accessories are available.
Via EBLWin, a "Detection type" has to be programmed:
Or (default): Chamber "Nitro" only or Chamber "Grizzle" only
will activate a fire alarm.
And: Chambers "Nitro" + "Grizzle" will activate a fire alarm.
Nitro: Chamber "Nitro" only will activate a fire alarm.
Grizzle: Chamber "Grizzle" only will activate a fire alarm.
And with pre-warning: Chambers "Nitro" + "Grizzle" will
activate a fire alarm. Chamber "Nitro" only in alarm or
Chamber "Grizzle" only in alarm, will activate a pre-warning.
The Address setting tool 3314 / 4414 is used for address and
mode settings:
Advanced mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
NORMAL mode: AE2010 L-P in this mode can be used in
system EBL512 G3 version > 2.1.x.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
9.1.1.5
Conventional Detector Bases (CDB)
2324 Base.
A conventional detector shall be plugged in a
conventional detector base 2324. A built-in LED is lit to
indicate that the detector plugged in the base has activated fire
alarm. Terminals for an ext. LED (2218).
50
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
9.1.1.6
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Conventional Detectors
4318 Combination heat detector. Rate-of-rise and fixed temperature,
59°C, heat detector class A1 R. Static response temp. range 5465°C, ambient temp. min./typical/max. -10/+25/+50°C.
Shall be plugged in a conventional detector base (2324).
4350 Multi detector.38 4350 is a smoke detector and a heat detector
within one housing. Scattered light (i.e. reflection of infrared
light) is used to detect smoke and the heat sensing element is a
thermistor. In order to secure the fire detection and to prevent
false (nuisance) alarms, an AI function is used, i.e.
a: combined heat and smoke sensing
b: variable delay function
c: adaptive learning function
See also chapter "Advanced mode, page 138.
The detector has unleaded soldering.
Shall be plugged in a conventional detector base (2324).
4352 Photoelectric smoke detector. Scattered light (i.e. reflection of
infrared light) is used to detect smoke. An advanced alarm
algorithm is used to secure the smoke detection and to prevent
false (nuisance) alarms, e.g. a minimum of nine consecutive
readings over the fire alarm level are required before the
detector goes into alarm. (One reading per sec.)
The detector has unleaded soldering.
Shall be plugged in a conventional detector base (2324).
4352 is replaced by 4452.
4452 Photoelectric smoke detector. Like 4352 but 4452 has a little
different design than the 4352 detector (see 4401) and the
smoke chamber net has even smaller holes. This will keep
insects and particles37 larger than smoke particles out of the
chamber.
4452 has replaced 4352.
4375 Heat detector. Fixed temperature heat detector, 60°C, class
A2S (static response temp. range 54-70°C), latching.
Min./typical/max. ambient temp. -10/+25/+40°C.
The detector has unleaded soldering. Shall be plugged in a
conventional detector base (2324).
4376 Heat detector. Like 4375 but 80°C, class BS (static response
temp. range 69-85°C), latching.
Min./typical/max. ambient temp. -10/+40/+60°C.
The detector has unleaded soldering. Shall be plugged in a
conventional detector base (2324).
38
This unit is no longer in our product range.
51
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
6295 Heat detector: Enclosed (IP67)39. Fixed temperature heat
detector, 57°C, class A2 S (static response temp. range 5470°C), latching.
Min./typical/max. ambient temp. -40/+25/+50°C. Built-in LED
is lit to indicate that the detector has activated a fire alarm.
Terminals for an ext. LED (2218).
6296 Heat detector: Enclosed (IP67)40. Like 6295 but 72°C, class B
S (static response temp. range 69-85°C), latching.
Min./typical/max. ambient temp. -40/+40/+65°C. Built-in LED
is lit to indicate that the detector has activated a fire alarm.
Terminals for an ext. LED ( 2218).
6297 Heat detector: Enclosed (IP67). Like 6295 but 87°C, class C S
(static response temp. range 84-100°C), latching.
Min./typical/max. ambient temp. -40/+55/+80°C. Built-in LED
is lit to indicate that the detector has activated a fire alarm.
Terminals for an ext. LED (2218).
6298 Heat detector: Enclosed (IP67). Like 6295 but 117°C, class E S
(static response temp. range 114-130°C), latching.
Min./typical/max. ambient temp. -40/+85/+110°C. No built-in
LED but terminals for an ext. LED (2218) - to indicate that the
detector has activated a fire alarm.
9.1.1.7
Accessories
3314 Address setting tool.41 Is used to write or read the units' COM
loop address (Technical address 001-255). It is also used to
write or read the mode (NORMAL, 2330 and 2312), see the
COM loop unit respectively. A connection cable with crocodile
clips and tab terminals is supplied with the tool and can be used
when required.
Put the ON/OFF switch in position ON and wait for a beep.
Plug the detector's SA & SB terminals onto the tool's SA & SB
terminals or, when required, use the connection cable.42
How to read: Press "READ", wait for a beep and read the
address and mode.
How to write: To select the mode, press "WRITE" and
"READ" at the same time and/or write the address. Press
"WRITE" and wait for a beep. ("READ" again as a check.)
39
This detector holds the ATEX classification:
Ex II 3GD EEx nA II T5 (T 100°C), -40°C < Ta < 50°C.
40
This detector holds the ATEX classification:
Ex II 3GD EEx nA II T5 (T 100°C), -40°C < Ta < 65°C.
41
3314 is replaced by 4414. NOTE! 3314 cannot be used for setting the
detectors 4400 and 4401 in Advanced mode.
42
Some units have flying leads for easier connection. After use they should
be disconnected and thrown away.
52
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
4414 Address setting tool. Is used to write or read the units' COM
loop address (Technical address 001-255). It is also used to
write or read the mode (Advanced43, NORMAL, 2330 and
2312), see the COM loop unit respectively for mode
information.
A connection cable with crocodile clips and tab terminals is
supplied with the tool and can be used when required.
4414 (orange front) has replaced 3314 (grey front) but 4414 is
only required when the 4400 and 4401 detectors shall be used in
Advanced mode.
Turn on the tool (On/Off/CLR button). A blinking curser and
mode M0 will be shown in the display. Plug the detector's SA
& SB terminals onto the tool's SA & SB terminals or, when
required, use the connection cable.44
How to read: Press "Read", wait for the OK, address and mode
info. and a beep.
How to write: To change the mode (if required) press "Write"
and "Read" at the same time, then press 0, 1, 2 or 3 for the
mode respectively. Type the address (no beginning zeroes) and
press "Write". Wait for the OK, address and mode info. and a
beep. (Press "Read" again for a double check.) More info. on
the backside of the tool.
3390 Label holder. To be mounted in an analog base (3312 / 3312F /
3312FL / 3379 / 4313)45. Intended for a label with "zoneaddress", "technical address", etc. to be read also when the
detector is plugged in its base. 100 label holders per packet.
Excl. labels.
3391 Labels for 3390. A packet with self-adhesive white labels for
label holder 3390. 10 A4-sheets à 132 labels for laser printer
usage. The print-out is done via EBLWin.
9.1.2
Addressable I/O units
3361 Addressable multipurpose I/O unit.46 Power supplied via the
COM loop. The unit has two programmable inputs:
Monitored input
….used as zone line input (Z) (terminals 6 & 7): End-of-line
capacitor 10 μF mounted in the last unit on the zone line. Short
43
Address setting tool 4414 has to be used to set the detectors 4400 and
4401 in Advanced mode. (Address setting tool 3314 cannot be used for the
Advanced mode.)
44
Some units have flying leads for easier connection. After use they should
be disconnected and thrown away.
45
Also in an enclosed analog heat detector (3309).
46
The same physical unit (3361) is also used for Fan control together with
the Fan control panel 4593. Then it has a separate dialog box in EBLWin.
53
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
circuit on the line can generate a fault or a fire alarm (set via
EBLWin). This input is intended for conventional detectors.47
Max. 1.5 mA. Cable: Max. 50 ohms and max. 50 nF.
....used as general input (In0) (terminals 5 & 7): An input for
NC or NO contacts (set via EBLWin).
Isolated input (In1) (terminals 8 & 9): An optocoupler input
(external 24 V DC / 8 mA is required). Normally low or high
(set via EBLWin).
The unit has two programmable relay48 outputs:
Relay output (Re0): NC or NO contacts (set via EBLWin).
Relay output (Re1): Like Re0.
Connections and examples, see drawings 512G3 - 31 & - 36.
Unit dimensions: (L x W x H) 90 x 70 x 32 mm.
A plastic protection cover is attached. The cover dimensions:
(L x W x H) 129 x 73 x 45 mm.
3361 is intended to be surface mounted and for indoor use in
dry premises. When required, the unit can be mounted in a
Waterproof (IP66 / 67) box (3362). 3361 has an LED to
indicate communication "OK" or alarm condition. For more
information, see the Product Leaflet. The COM loop address is
set with the Address setting tool (3314 / 4414). The unit has an
address label on which the unit's COM loop address can be
written.
The Address setting tool (3314 / 4414) is also used for the mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 3361 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
3364
Addressable 2 voltage outputs unit. The unit is connected to
a COM loop. External 24 V DC power supply is required (via a
3366 unit or EBL512 G3).
The unit has two programmable and supervised voltage outputs
(VO0-VO1), intended for alarm devices (e.g. sirens). An endof-line capacitor (470nF) is to be mounted in the last device
alt. a capacitor (470nF) in up to five alarm devices:
The unit also has a special voltage output (VO2) intended for
fire door closing only. The trigger condition "Fire door
closing" and the controlling detectors have to be programmed.
The "fire door closing function" is described on page 108 and
47
It is via EBLWin possible to define this input to function like a manual
call point ("Used as MCP"), i.e. it will not be collectively disabled via menu
"Disable zone, H2/B1", can not be included in two-unit dependence, it can
not use the "alarm delay" function and it can not be disabled via a time
channel.
48
Relay contacts: max. 2 A @ 30 V DC / 125 V AC.
54
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
besides that function the output VO2 will also be powerless
approx. 30 sec. after:
- the "/Mains OK input" (terminal 8.) goes high, see below.
- the COM loop communication is interrupted = 3364 has no
connection / communication with the c.i.e.
The unit also has two inputs, i.e. one for power supply (24 V
DC) and one for "/Mains OK".
VO0: Normally low or high (set via EBLWin), 24 V DC,
1 A.49
VO1: Like VO0.
VO2: Normally high, 24 V DC, 1 A.49 (Fire door closing
function.)
24 V DC: From an external power supply (unit 3366 or
EBL512 G3)
/Mains OK: From an external power supply unit (3366) when
the fire door closing function (ABDL) is to be used.
Normally low = The main power source (230 V AC) in the
External power supply unit is okay.
Connections and examples, see drawings 512 G3 - 31 & - 38.
Unit dimensions: (L x W x H) 90 x 70 x 32 mm. A plastic
protection cover is attached. The cover dimensions: (L x W x
H) 129 x 73 x 45 mm. The unit is intended to be surface
mounted and for indoor use in dry premises. When required, the
unit can be mounted in a Waterproof box (IP66 / 67) 3362.
For more information, see the Technical Description and the
Product Leaflet.
The COM loop address is set with the Address setting tool
(3314 / 4414). The unit has an address label on which the
programmed technical address can be written.
The Address setting tool (3314 / 4414) is also used for mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 3364 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
NOTE! See also chapter "Limitations", page 196.
9.1.3
Alarm devices (addressable sounders)
3377 Addressable siren. The siren is connected to a COM loop. It is
power supplied via the COM loop, i.e. the number of sirens is
depending on the type and number of other units connected to
the COM loop.50 Red ABS plastic housing. Three sound types
(tones) and three priority levels are available.
Steady (cont.) 990 Hz
Intermittent (pulsed) 990 Hz, 0.5s / 0.5s (1 Hz)
Alternating (two-tone) 990 / 650 Hz, 0.25s / 0.25s (2 Hz)
49
50
Cont. 1 A, during 10 ms 1.4 A.
The number of 3377 + 4477 + 3379 units must be < 50 per COM loop.
55
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
For each level an output control expression and a sound type is
programmed (via EBLWin). For more technical data, see the
Product Leaflet. 3377 is replaced by 4477.
The COM loop address is set with the Address setting tool
(3314 / 4414), which is also used for mode setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 3377 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
NOTE! See also chapter "Limitations", page 196.
4477 Addressable siren. 4477 is like the 3377 unit but it also has a
built-in short circuit isolator (see page 57), which does not use
any separate COM loop address. 4477 has replaced 3377.
NORMAL mode: In this mode the isolator is in use.
Programmed in EBLWin as siren type 4477.
2330 mode: In this mode the isolator is not in use.
Programmed in EBLWin as siren type 3377.
2312 mode: Cannot be used.
3379 Addressable sounder base.51 3379 consists of an analog base
(3312) mounted together with a sounder. 3379 is mounted in
the ceiling. An analog detector can be plugged in the base,
which has screw terminals for the COM loop and an ext. LED
(2218). Prepared for mechanical lock of the detector - if
required. Recess for label holder (3391). 3379 is power
supplied via the COM loop, i.e. the number of sounder bases is
depending on the type and number of other units connected to
the COM loop50. Three sound types (tones) and three priority
levels are available.
Steady (cont.) 3650 Hz
Intermittent (pulsed) 3650 Hz, 0.5s / 0.5s (1 Hz)
Intermittent (pulsed) 3650 Hz, 0.167s / 0.167s (3 Hz)
For each level an output control expression and a sound type is
programmed via EBLWin. High sound output (approx. 4.5 dB
higher) can be selected via EBLWin. For more technical data,
see the Product Leaflet.
The COM loop address is set with the Address setting tool
(3314 / 4414). The unit has an address label on which the
programmed COM loop address can be written. (The detector
has its own COM loop address set via the Address setting tool
3314 / 4414.)
The Address setting tool 3314 / 4414 is also used for mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 3379 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
NOTE! See also chapter "Limitations", page 196.
51
This unit has replaced the Sounder base 3378.
56
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
4380 Addressable beacon.52 The LED beacon is connected to a COM
loop. It is power supplied via the COM loop, i.e. the number of
beacons is depending on the type and number of other units
connected to the COM loop but max. 10 per COM loop. Red
ABS plastic housing and PC lens. 1 Cd light output. The flash
rate is 1 Hz. An output control expression is programmed (via
EBLWin). For more technical data, see the Product Leaflet.
NOTE! This unit has been removed from our product range.
The COM loop address is set with the Address setting tool
(3314 / 4414), which is also used for mode setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 4380 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
4383 Light indicator. The light indicator is used as a complement to
audible alarm devices. It is of type A for indoor use. All
electronics and the eight red LEDs are mounted in a transparent
ABS housing. The light indicator is plugged in an analog
detector base 3312xx (3379 / 4313), then an analog detector is
plugged in the light indicator. The light is visible 360°
(horizontal). The light indicator is programmed with a control
expression for activation, like a programmable output or alarm
device. It takes one COM loop address. The flash rate is 1 Hz.
For more technical data, see the Product Leaflet.
The COM loop address is set with the Address setting tool
(3314 / 4414), which is also used for mode setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 4383 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
9.1.4
Short circuit isolators (addressable)
According to the EN54 standard, at least one short circuit isolator is
required per 32 alarm points on the COM loop. In the Australian and
New Zealand conventions at least one isolator per 40 alarm points.
National regulations have to be followed.
Up to 64 isolators can be used per COM loop.
Each COM loop short circuit isolator 4313 is to be programmed
(via EBLWin) regarding:



COM loop address53
Name (Normally not changed)
Sequence Number (Serial Number in the COM loop's Adirection.) 0-63.53
Connections, see dwg 512 G3 - 31. (See especially the L / SA wire!)
52
This unit is no longer in our product range.
53
The units 4433, 4439 and 4477 have a built-in isolator that don't occupy
any COM loop address and the isolator’s Sequence Number is set in the
dialog box for the 4433, 4439 and 4477 unit respectively.
57
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
4313 Analog base with isolator.54 4313 is an analog base with a
built-in short circuit isolator. In case of short circuit on the
COM loop, the number of disabled units will be minimised.
4313 is power supplied via the COM loop. For more
information, see the Product Leaflet. The COM loop address is
set with the Address setting tool (3314 / 4414). The unit has an
address label on which the programmed COM loop address is to
be written.
The Address setting tool (3314 / 4414) is also used for mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 4313 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
Up to 64 isolators can be used, which gives 65 loop segments. Each
isolator has to be given a Sequence Number, 00-63. The isolators
have to be connected consecutively (Sequence Number 00-01-02-0304-05-06-07-08-09-10-11-12-13-14-15 - - up to 63) in the COM
loop's A-direction. NOTE! EBL512 G3 has one built-in isolator in
the-A direction (no. "A") and one in the B-direction (no. "B").
Figure 10. Four isolators connected to a COM loop gives five
loop segments, i.e. Segment A (A-00), B (00-01), C (01-02), D
(02-03) and E (03-B). If more isolators have to be added, the
sequence numbers have to be updated (via EBLWin), e.g. if
one isolator has to be put in between isolator no. 00 and no. 01
in the figure, the new isolator has to be no. 01 and the old no.
01 has to be no. 02 and so on.
Short circuit / cut-off (break) on the COM loop
See chapter "Short circuit isolators", page 101 and also EBL512 G3
Operating Instructions, chapter "Fault messages".
54
This unit has replaced the Addr. isolator 4370.
58
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
9.1.5
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Built-in isolators
The units 4433, 4439 and 4477 have a built-in isolator that do not
require any separate COM loop address, only the Sequence Number,
00-63. As an option, these units can be used without the isolator in
function. If so, they have to be programmed in EBLWin as if they
were 3333, 3339 and 3377 units and via the Address setting tool 4414
set to 2330 mode instead of NORMAL mode.
The unit 4620 has a built-in isolator that do not require any separate
COM loop address, only the Sequence Number, 00-63.
9.1.6
Units for Hazardous (Ex) areas
In hazardous (Ex) areas, Intrinsically Safe (IS) and approved products
are required. The IS alarm points are connected to an interface outside
the Ex area.
Normally the analog addressable units (IS smoke and heat detectors)
shall be used, else conventional units (e.g. IS manual call point).
Conventional units are connected via a Galvanic isolator MTL 5061
(2820) to an expansion board 4580 Ex zone line input. See also
drawings 512 G3 – 33 and – 37.
Analog / addressable units are connected to a COM loop via an IS
barrier unit 2842. See also drawing 512 G3 – 31.
9.1.6.1
Galvanic isolators / IS barrier units
MTL5061 Galvanic isolator (2820). The isolator is used to connect
conventional IS detectors and manual call points to an
expansion board 4580 zone line input (programmed in
"Resistor-Ex" mode). The isolator has two zone line inputs and
two outputs (Channel 1 & 2) and it is mounted in a Waterproof
box (IP66/67). Four compression glands for the cable entries
and an end-of-line resistor (10K) with an area >230 mm2 are
supplied. Box dimensions (L x W x H): 175 x 125 x 150 mm.
BASEEFA classification: EEx ia IIC Tamb=60°C.
2842 Intrinsically safe (IS) barrier unit. The barrier unit is used to
connect analog addressable IS detectors to a COM loop. The
unit has connectors for COM loop in / out, external power
supply (24 V DC, 60 mA) and one IS COM line for connection
of up to 20 IS detectors 2840 and 2841. It is mounted in a
Waterproof box (IP66/67). Five compression glands for the
cable entries are supplied. Box dimensions (L x W x H): 280 x
280 x 133 mm. ATEX class: Ex ia IIC.
9.1.6.2
Intrinsically Safe mounting bases
YBN-R / 4 IS
Intrinsically Safe mounting base (2812). In the
base can be plugged an intrinsically safe conventional smoke
(2810) or heat (2811) detector. The base has terminals for the
zone line (in/out) and for an ext. LED.
59
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
9.1.6.3
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Intrinsically Safe photoelectric smoke detectors
SLR-E-IS Intrinsically Safe photoelectric smoke detector (2810).
A conventional photoelectric (optical) smoke detector, shall be
plugged in the intrinsically safe mounting base. The detector
has two built-in LEDs that are lit to indicate that the detector
has generated fire alarm. Zone classification: Cat. 1, 2 or 3.
BASEEFA classification: II 1G EEx ia IIC T5 (-20°C < 55°C).
Max 20 per zone.
2840 Analog IS smoke detector.
An analog / addressable photoelectric smoke detector. The detector is supplied with a backbox and three cable glands. The detector has one built-in LED
to indicate that the detector has generated fire alarm. The
function is similar to the analog photoelectric smoke detector
4301, see page 45. It has to be connected to a COM loop via an
IS barrier unit 2842. ATEX class: Ex ia IIC T5.
9.1.6.4
Intrinsically Safe heat detectors
DCD-1E-IS Intrinsically Safe heat detector. A conventional Rate of
Rise heat detector, fixed temperature 60°C (class A1), shall be
plugged in the intrinsically safe mounting base. Two built-in
LEDs that are lit to indicate that the detector has generated fire
alarm. Zone classification: Cat. 1, 2 or 3. BASEEFA
classification: II 1 G EEx ia IIC T5, Tamb=55°C. Max 20 per
zone.
2841 Analog IS heat detector. An analog / addressable heat detector.
The detector is supplied with a back-box and three cable glands.
The detector has one built-in LED to indicate that the detector
has generated fire alarm. The function is similar to the analog
heat detector 3308, see page 43. It has to be connected to a
COM loop via an IS barrier unit 2842. ATEX class: Ex ia IIC
T5
9.1.7
Other COM loop units
3366 External power supply. Conforms to EN54-4. 3366 is
connected to a COM loop, i.e. it is monitored from EBL512 G3
and e.g. loss of the main power source will generate a fault in
EBL512 G3. It can be used as power supply for external
equipment requiring 24 V DC with battery backup, e.g. the
3364 unit (see page 54). It also has a "/Mains OK" output
(normally low), intended to be connected to the corresponding
input on the 3364 unit.
A light grey metal housing (HxWxD, 288 x 400 x 95 mm).
There is space for two maintenance-free sealed Lead-Acid
backup batteries, 2 x 12 V, 7.5 Ah as the second power source.
Batteries with higher capacity (up to 65 Ah) have to be placed
outside the housing. There are cable inlets on the top, bottom
and back sides of the housing. Two cable glands are supplied.
60
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The unit has one 24 V DC55 power supply output for external
equipment with up to 2.1 A or 0.85 A continuous current
consumption, at the same time as battery charging is active.56
In case of an activated fire alarm in the system, the continuous
current consumption can be up to 4 A.
It has a number of security functions, e.g. against to high
current output and to low battery voltage etc. For more
information, see the Technical Description and the Product
Leaflet. See also drawings 512 G3 – 31 and – 38.
The COM loop address is set with the Address setting tool
(3314 / 4414). The unit has an address label on which the
programmed technical address can be written.
The Address setting tool (3314 / 4414) is also used for the mode
setting:
NORMAL mode: Used for 3366 in system EBL512 G3.
2330 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
4445 Local Alarm Acknowledgement Unit. The LAAU consists of a
p.c.b. with an alarm indication LED and a green non-latching
switch for acknowledgement of a false alarm. The p.c.b. is
mounted on the back-side of a white ABS lid. It can be wall
mounted with a frame (not included in 4445) or flush mounted
in a 65mm circular mounting box. One LAAU per LAA zone
and up to 100 LAA zones per control unit can be used. The
COM loop address is set with the Address setting tool (3314 /
4414). See also chapter "Local Alarm Acknowledgement
(LAA)", page 124.
The Address setting tool 3314 / 4414 is used for address and
mode settings:
Advanced mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
NORMAL mode: Used for 4445 in system EBL512 G3
version > 2.2.x.
2330 mode: Used as spare part for the AAFC unit.
2312 mode: Not used in system EBL512 G3.
55
The rated output voltage for the main power source (rectifier) is 24 V ±
1%. Max. ripple 500 mVp-p. The rated output voltage for the second power
source (the backup battery) is 18 – 28 V DC. NOTE! The voltage will,
however, decrease to approx. 15 V when the output will be switched off in
order not to damage the battery.
56
A current consumption of 0.85-2.1 A allows only the "low current
charging mode", i.e. the battery capacity can be up to 27 Ah.
A current consumption < 0.85 A allows the "high current charging
mode", i.e. the battery capacity can be up to 65 Ah.
61
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
4446 Alarm Acknowledgement Facility Control.57 The AAFC is a
AAFC
box with an alarm indication LED and a non-latching switch
"Press to acknowledge false alarm". The AAFC unit has the
same functionality as the LAAU 4445 unit. The COM loop
address is set with the Address setting tool (3314 / 4414). See
also chapter "Local Alarm Acknowledgement (LAA)", page
124.
4593 Fan control panel. A panel for control of eight fans. It contains
of a light grey mounting plate, two Fan control application
boards 4594 and two fronts with LEDs and push buttons for
the Fan control functions. The panel is intended to be mounted
in the General control cabinet 4590, in which three Fan control
panels 4593 can be mounted. For connection to the c.i.e. is one
I/O Matrix board 4582 required for each 4594 board. Each
4594 board is connected to a COM loop and 24 V DC. Up to
eight 4593 panels can be used (i.e. sixteen 4594 with 4582).
One I/O unit 3361 is also required for each fan. For more
information, see Technical Description MEW01245.
9.1.8
Obsolete units
Obsolete units that can be used with EBL512 G3, V2.2.x:
See chapter "COM loop units", page 38.
NOTE 1! Only address 1-127 can be used for any unit set in 23xx
mode.
NOTE 2! When ‘old’ units (e.g. 22xx & 23xx units) are used the
following is valid:
The "Autogenerate" function cannot be used. (Via EBLWin)
The "Check loop" function cannot be used. (Via EBLWin)
9.2
Units connected to the RS485 interface
Up to sixteen Display Units type Ext. FBPs (1826 / 1828) and/or Alert
Annunciation Units (1735 / 1736) and/or Ext. Presentation Units
(1728) can be connected to the built-in RS485 interface (J4:37-38) in
EBL512 G3. Note that the current consumption for 1826 with printer
can be up to 200 mA when printing. (Power supply at J4:35-36.)
Connections, see drawing 512 G3 – 24.
The number of units that can be power supplied via EBL512 G3 (or an
external power supply) is depending on all other units connected to
the same c.i.e. / external power supply. Up to 1200 m cable can be
used. For more information, see Technical description respectively.
NOTE! Display Unit software version > 1.4.1 is required.
57
This unit is available on the Australian market only. This unit will be
identified as a 3333 unit when the "Autogenerate" function is used. (Via
EBLWin)
62
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Address and S/W mode settings
The display and the push buttons (in the unit respectively) are used to
set the address, which also can be changed via EBL512 G3. The S/W
mode shall be set to xxxx – 1587 (xxxx = type number). See the
Technical Description for the unit respectively.
The first unit shall have the address 00, the second unit address 01 and
so on58. Follow the Address setting instructions in the Technical
Description for the unit respectively.
Via EBLWin can "Selective alarm presentation" be programmed, i.e.
you can select which alarms that shall be presented in each unit, see
the Technical Description for the unit respectively.
NOTE! As an alternative, German / Swiss Fire Brigade Panels (see
below) can be connected to the RS485 interface.
9.2.1
External Fire Brigade Panels
1826 External Fire Brigade Panel (ext. FBP). A light grey metal
housing (HxWxD, 290x 415 x 128 mm) with a door. A key is
required to open the door, which has a Plexiglas ahead of the
FBP front. It has cable inlets on the top, bottom and back sides
and is intended to be wall mounted. Two compression glands
are attached.
LED indicators and push buttons on the front are like the upper
black part of the EBL128 / 512 front. The front's designation
texts are in Swedish. A neutral front is available, where the
designation texts, in any language, are made separately and by
production put into a transparent "text slot" for the LED and
push button respectively.
All or selected alarms will be presented in a display
(alphanumeric LCD, 2x40 characters), with back-light. An
alarm text will also be presented together with each alarm, if
programmed in EBL512 G3. Furthermore, at least 617 texts for
selected fire alarms can be stored in the unit and will in such a
case be shown, instead of the texts sent from EBL512 G3 for
these alarms. These text messages will be downloaded to the
unit via EBL512 G3. A built-in buzzer will sound like in
EBL512 G3. The buzzer can be silenced and the alarm devices
in the installation can be silenced. They will re-sound for a new
alarm.59 When there are queued alarms in the system, you can
scroll amongst them and they can be reset. Any fault in the
system will be presented as "General fault in system" and the
buzzer will sound.60 A Printer 1835 can be mounted in ext.
FBP 1826. It will print all the alarms, including the alarm texts.
58
The connection order on the line is not dependent of the address.
59
Silenced or disabled can be set via EBLWin (System properties).
60
Not valid for the Swedish convention (SBF).
63
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
New S/W versions can be downloaded directly in the unit. The
unit is power supplied from EBL512 G3 or an ext. power
supply.
The unit shall run in S/W mode 1826/28 – 1587. Up to 1200 m
cable can be used. For more information, see Technical
description MEW00249.
1828 External Fire Brigade Panel (ext. FBP). "Like" 1826 but with a
compact size enclosure (HxWxD, 145 x 220 x 50 mm) made of
grey high impact ABS. Fitted with a supplementary "O" ring
gasket, it will comply with IP61, in respect of dust and
moisture. The unit has no door, i.e. the front is accessed
directly but a key is required to get access to the push buttons.
They are disabled until they are supposed to be used. The unit
shall be wall mounted. Two compression glands are attached.
In all other respects it is like 1826, except that a printer cannot
be mounted in 1828.
The unit shall run in S/W mode 1826/28 – 1587. Up to 1200 m
cable can be used. For more information, see Technical
description MEW00249.
1835 Printer. Can be mounted in the External Fire Brigade Panel
1826. It will print all the alarms, including the alarm texts.
Note that the printer current consumption is up to 200 mA when
printing.
9.2.2
Alert Annunciation Units
When the Alert Annunciation (AA) function shall be used in system
EBL512 G3, a unit is required for the related manoeuvres, i.e. to
acknowledge / reset the AA alarms. For a detailed description of the
Alert Annunciation function, see chapter "Alert Annunciation", page
122.
1735 Alert Annunciation Unit (AAU). A compact size enclosure
(HxWxD, 145 x 220 x 50 mm) made of grey high impact ABS.
Fitted with a supplementary "O" ring gasket, it will comply
with IP61, in respect of dust and moisture. The unit has no
door, i.e. the front is accessed directly but the push buttons are
disabled until they are supposed to be used. The unit shall be
wall mounted. Two compression glands are attached. The
front's designation texts are in Swedish.
All or selected fire alarms will be presented in a display
(alphanumeric LCD, 2x40 characters), with back-light. An
alarm text will also be presented together with each alarm, if
programmed in EBL512 G3. Furthermore, at least 617 texts
can for selected fire alarms be stored in the unit and will in such
a case be shown, instead of the texts sent out from EBL512 G3
for these alarms. These text messages will be downloaded to
the unit via EBL512 G3. A built-in buzzer will sound to
indicate a not acknowledged AA alarm.
64
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
New software versions can be downloaded directly in the unit.
The unit is power supplied from EBL512 G3 or an external
power supply.
The unit has the following LEDs:
Fire and Alarms queued, indicating fire / AA alarm.
Operation, indicating that the unit is in operation, i.e. the AA
function is enabled in the system. A time channel can be used
to enable the AA function.
Fire brigade alerted, indicating that the "Fire brigade tx"
output is activated in EBL512 G3 because:
- the activated fire alarm is not an AA alarm
- the AA function has been ended, e.g. the acknowledge or
investigation time respectively has run out, etc.
Acknowledge, indicating that the AA alarm has been
acknowledged.
The unit has the following push buttons:
Alarms queued, used to scroll amongst the alarms.
Acknowledge, used to acknowledge an AA alarm and hereby
also silence the buzzer.
Reset, used to reset an AA alarm.
The unit shall run in S/W mode 1735 – 1587. Up to 1200 m
cable can be used. For more information, see Technical
description MEW00224.
1736 Alert Annunciation Unit (AAU). This unit is like 1735, except
it has a neutral front, where the designation texts, in any
language, are made separately and by production put into a
transparent "text slot" for the LED and push button respectively.
(This front also holds one extra LED & two extra push
buttons.).
The unit shall run in S/W mode 1736 – 1587. Up to 1200 m
cable can be used. For more information, see Technical
description MEW00224.
9.2.3
External Presentation Units
1728 External Presentation unit (EPU). A compact size enclosure
(HxWxD, 145 x 220 x 50 mm) made of grey high impact ABS.
Fitted with a supplementary "O" ring gasket, it will comply
with IP61, in respect of dust and moisture. The unit has no
door, i.e. the front is accessed directly, when required. The
push buttons are disabled until they are supposed to be used.
The unit shall be wall mounted. Two compression glands are
attached. The front's designation texts are in Swedish. This
unit is intended for pre-warning, co-incidence61, fire (and heavy
smoke / heat) alarm presentation. If there are two or more
61
Two zone / address dependence.
65
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
alarms in the system, you can scroll amongst them but the fire
alarms cannot be reset via this unit.
All or selected alarms will be presented in a display (alphanumeric LCD, 2x40 characters), with back-light. An alarm text
will also be presented together with each alarm, if programmed
in EBL512 G3. Furthermore, at least 617 texts can for selected
fire alarms be stored in the unit and will in such a case be
shown, instead of the texts sent out from EBL512 G3 for these
alarms. These text messages will be downloaded to the unit via
EBL512 G3.
Any fault in the system will be presented as "General fault in
system". The buzzer will sound.60 It can be silenced. Any
disablement in the system will be presented as "General
disablement in system".60
A built-in buzzer will sound like in EBL512 G3. The buzzer
can be silenced but the alarm devices in the installation cannot
be silenced via this unit. New software versions can be
downloaded directly in the unit. The unit is power supplied
from EBL512 G3 or an external power supply. The unit shall
run in S/W mode 1728 – 1587. Up to 1200 m cable can be
used.
For more information, see Technical description
MEW00290.
9.2.4
German Fire Brigade Panels - Schraner
SM3-RM Redundancy module. A p.c.b. which serves as an interface
between the control unit RS485 interface and the two redundant
networks to the FAT-KÜ / FAT-S. The p.c.b is mounted on a
mounting plate inside the control unit. It occupies the same
space as one expansion board so max 5 expansion boards can be
mounted in the control unit when the redundancy module is
used.
FAT-KÜ German Fire Brigade Control and Indicator Panel
(Feuerwehr-Anzeigetableau combined with a FeuerwehrBedienfeld). A red metal housing (HxWxD, 360 x 250 x 60
mm) with a door. A key is required to open the door, which has
a Plexiglas ahead of the front. It has cable inlets on the back
side and is intended to be wall mounted.
The function, Display information, LED indicators and push
buttons on the front are in accordance with DIN 14661 / 14662.
The front's designation texts are in German. The FAT-KÜ
is to be connected to the redundant network created by the
SM3-RM redundancy module.
FAT-S German Fire Brigade Indicator Panel (FeuerwehrAnzeigetableau). A grey metal housing (HxWxD, 180 x 250 x
55 mm) with a door. A key is required to open the door, which
has a Plexiglas ahead of the front. It has cable inlets on the
back side and is intended to be wall mounted.
The function, Display information, LED indicators and push
66
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
buttons on the front are in accordance with DIN 14662. The
front's designation texts are in German. The FAT-S is to be
connected to the redundant network created by the SM3-RM
redundancy module.
FBF-D German Fire Brigade Control Panel (Feuerwehr-Bedienfeld).
A grey metal housing (HxWxD, 180 x 250 x 55 mm) with a
door. A key is required to open the door, which has a Plexiglas
ahead of the front. It has cable inlets on the back side and is
intended to be wall mounted.
The function, Display information, LED indicators and push
buttons on the front are in accordance with DIN 14661. The
front's designation texts are in German. The FBF-D is to be
connected directly to the RS485 interface in the control unit.
Normally the combined fire brigade control and indicator panel FATKÜ and/or the fire brigade indicator panel FAT-S should be used,
together with the redundancy module SM3-RM. This provides the
highest safety (redundant cabling) and information. Max 8 FAT-KÜ
or one FAT-KÜ + 11 FAT-S can be connected to one control unit.
Note that the redundancy module handles the communication on the
redundant network by itself so only one panel (in fact, the redundancy
module) should be programmed in EBLWin. The connected number
of panels is configured by DIP-switches on the redundancy module.
The redundancy module has a relay output that is activated if there is a
fault in the redundant network. This output should be connected to one
of the inputs in the control unit and that input should be programmed
as ‘External fault’ so the control unit can signal a fault if there is a
problem in the redundant network.
In installations where only one fire brigade panel is required, a FBF-D
could be used. This unit is connected directly to the RS485 interface
in the control unit and should be placed next to the control unit.
Connections see drawing “512 G3 – 24” sheet 2.
9.2.5
Swiss Fire Brigade Panel - IFAM
FBF-CH-seriell German Fire Brigade Control Panel (FeuerwehrBedienfeld). A dark grey metal housing (HxWxD, 175 x 142 x
40 mm) with a front and a key. It has cable inlets on the top,
bottom and back sides and is intended to be wall mounted.
The function, LED indicators and push buttons on the front are
in accordance with SN 054 002 : 1999 and 20-03d.
Connections see drawing “512 G3 – 24” sheet 2.
67
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
9.2.6
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
German Fire Brigade Panels - IFAM
These units are obsolete but can still be used in the system. Note that
it is not possible to mix IFAM panels and Schraner panels in the same
system.
FBP 2003 62 German Fire Brigade Control Panel (FeuerwehrBedienfeld). A grey metal housing (HxWxD, 185 x 255 x 58
mm) with a door. A key is required to open the door, which has
a Plexiglas ahead of the front. It has cable inlets on the top,
bottom and back sides and is intended to be wall mounted.
The function, LED indicators and push buttons on the front are
in accordance with DIN 14661. The front's designation texts
are in German. Serial RS485 interface for IHD protocol.
The unit is power supplied from EBL512 G3 (or an ext. power
supply). Up to 1200 m cable can be used.
FAT 2002 63 German Fire Brigade Indicator Panel (FeuerwehrAnzeigetableau). A grey metal housing (HxWxD, 185 x 255 x
58 mm) with a door. A key is required to open the door, which
has a Plexiglas ahead of the front. It has cable inlets on the top,
bottom and back sides and is intended to be wall mounted.
The function, Display information, LED indicators and push
buttons on the front are in accordance with DIN 14662. The
front's designation texts are in German. Serial RS485
interface for IHD protocol.
Connections see drawing “512 G3 – 24” sheet 1.
9.3
Units connected to the RS232 interface J7
9.3.1
Web-servers
1598 Web-server II. This unit can be used:
a) for presentation of the actual c.i.e. status in a PC
using the web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer. It
can also send e-mails in case of pre-warning, fire alarm,
fault, disablement, test mode alarm and/or service
signal.
b) for remote control and two-way communication.
Ten different users and three access levels.
c) as a gateway to other PC systems etc. The following
alternatives are available today:
c1) EBL Talk (RS232 or TCP/IP) is an open
protocol, used to transmit and present fire alarm
information in a separate PC / system.
62
IFAM GmbH Erfurth, type FBF 2003.
63
IFAM GmbH Erfurth, type FAT 2002.
68
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
c2) Tateco (RS232) used to transmit and present
fire alarm information in an Ascom Tateco paging
system.
c3) SIA (RS232) used to transmit and present fire
alarm information in a separate PC
application.
c4) MODBUS (RS232) used to transmit and
present fire alarm information in a separate
PC application.
d) as a gateway to a security management system via
EBLnet (TCP/IP). EBLnet licence required.
A Web-server Config tool (included in EBLWin) is used for
the configuration, which is downloaded to the web-server via
TCP/IP. Also the Web-server software is downloaded via this
tool.
The Web-server II consists of a light grey plastic cabinet
(90x25x69.5 mm), which shall be vertically mounted on the
symmetric 35 mm DIN rail inside the EBL512 G3 c.i.e.
Web-server II has the following interfaces:
RS232 (PLC COM) to connect the web-server to J7 in the
EBL512 G3 c.i.e.
RS232 (MODEM COM) to connect the web-server to other
PC / system
RJ45 (10 BASE-T) to connect the web-server to Internet / an
intranet (LAN)
Molex 3.5 to connect the web-server to J3 (24 V DC) in the
EBL512 G3 c.i.e.
9.4
Other units
9.4.1
Alert Annunciation Controllers
1740
Alert Annunciation Controller (AAC). This unit has no
display, i.e. it has to be mounted close to EBL512 G3 (or an
ext. FBP) where the fire alarms will be presented.
The compact size enclosure (HxWxD, 145 x 220 x 50 mm) is
made of grey high impact ABS. Fitted with a supplementary
"O" ring gasket, it will comply with IP61, in respect of dust
and moisture. The unit has no door, i.e. the front is accessed
directly but the push buttons are disabled until they are
supposed to be used. The front's designation texts are in
Swedish.
The unit shall be wall mounted. The LED "Acknowledge"
can be turned on by the push button "Acknowledge" or by an
input, i.e. a programmable output. This is set via a jumper
"JP1" in the unit. The unit is power supplied from EBL512
69
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
G3 or an external power supply. One supplementary
compression gland can be used for cable entry.
The unit has the following LEDs:
Fire, indicating fire / AA alarm.
Operation, indicating that the unit is in operation, i.e. the AA
function is enabled in the system. A time channel can be used
to enable this function.
Fire brigade alerted, indicating that the "Fire brigade tx"
output is activated in EBL512 G3 because:
- the activated fire alarm is not an AA alarm
- the AA function has been ended, e.g. the acknowledge or
investigation time has run out, etc.
Acknowledge, indicating that the AA alarm has been
acknowledged.
The unit has the following push buttons:
Acknowledge, used to acknowledge an AA alarm.
Reset, used to reset an AA alarm.
Connections and more details are to be found in the Technical
Description MEW00283.
9.4.2
External LED
2218
9.4.3
Ext. LED (ext. indicator). Used when a detector is placed out
of view or hidden. The LED is lit at the same time as the LED
in the detector / base it is connected to. It has a "Burning
house" symbol instead of any text. 2218 can be connected to all
types of Panasonic detectors / bases. The input is polarised.
J2:1 (+5 to +35 V DC) for conventional detectors / bases
J2:2 (+; < 25 mA) for analog detectors / bases
J2:3 (0 V)
JP1: Link, always open.
To be wall mounted (87 x 87 x 30 mm).
Alarm devices (sounders, etc.)
Regarding addressable alarm devices, see page 55.
In the Panasonic product range are no alarm devices intended for a
supervised (monitored) voltage output (e.g. S0 – S3 in EBL512 G3).
Connections of alarm devices according to drawings 512 G3 – 23 and
-38.
9.4.4
Door release magnets
In the Panasonic product range are no Door release magnets. Door
release magnets shall always be provided with a "suppression diode"
(e.g. 1N4004) in parallel with the coil, like in the alarm devices, see
drawing 512 G3 - 23.
70
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
9.4.5
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Boxes
3362 Waterproof box (IP66 / 67). A grey polycarbonate box with
ingress protection rating IP66 / 67. Four compression glands
are included for the cable entries. Dimensions (L x W x H):
175 x 125 x 75 mm. 3362 can be used for e.g.:
Addressable multipurpose I/O unit 3361
Addressable 2 voltage outputs unit 3364
9.4.6
Duct detector chambers
6377 Duct detector chamber UG-4. The housing is made of grey
ABS and the venturi pipe is made of aluminium. It is supplied
with four IP65 glands for cable entry. 6377 can be used in
conventional as well as analog fire alarm systems, depending on
the base and detector mounted inside the housing (base 2324 +
4352 or base 3312 F/FL + 4301). The venturi pipe is available
with or without a built-in fan and in three lengths (0.6, 1.5 &
2.8 m). The pipe can easily be shortened to suit the ventilation
duct. Mounting bracket and filters are also available. For more
information see Data sheet MEW01280.
9.4.7
German key cabinet
A German key cabinet with an interface according to VdS 2105 can be
directly connected to the control unit. A 4583DE expansion board is
required.
For connections and information on how to program the inputs and
outputs see drawing “512 G3 – 23” sheet 3.
NOTE! The Sabotage line must be connected to Input I2 on a 4583DE
expansion board because of its special characteristics.
71
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
10
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Programmable inputs
In each control unit are four programmable, not supervised inputs
(I0-I3) available.
In EBL512 G3 can also be mounted the Inputs and Outputs expansion
board 4583, with five programmable inputs (Input 0-4). See chapter
"Expansion boards 458x", page 26. These inputs can be supervised or
not supervised.
On the COM loops can be connected the addressable multipurpose I/O
unit 3361 with two programmable inputs.
Each input is programmed (via EBLWin), see dialog boxes below.
Figure 11. EBLWin "Input" dialog boxes. Different trigger conditions require
different additional information, i.e. only the enabled fields can/shall be filled in.
NOTE! The 3361 unit, Input 0, has a special input dialog box.
10.1
Control unit Inputs I0 - I3
Normally open (R > 20K) or Normally closed (R < 500)
Activation time: > 1 sec.
Connections, see drawing 512 G3 – 23.
10.2
Inputs 0 - 4 on exp. board 4583
Connections, see drawing 512 G3 – 35.
10.2.1
Not supervised
Normally open (R > 20K) or Normally closed (R < 500)
Activation time: > 10 sec.
10.2.2
Supervised
Each supervised input can be in different states.
Depending on the selected logic, Normally open (high resistance) or
Normally closed (low resistance), the following table is valid:
72
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
10.2.2.1
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Line resistance R
Normally open
(high resistance)
Normally closed
(low resistance)
R > 6K8
Fault; Open circuit
(cut-off)
Fault; Open circuit
(cut-off)
6K8 > R > 2K
(nom. 3K3)
Not activated
Activated
2K > R > 70
(nom. 680)
Activated
Not activated
R < 70
Short-circuit
Short-circuit
Input line fault
If open circuit (cut-off) or short-circuit is detected on a supervised
input, a fault will be generated in EBL512 G3 and the following fault
message will be displayed:
FAULT: Input x expansion board x,
control unit xx
10.3
Inputs 0 - 4 on exp. board 4583DE
Connections, see drawing 512 G3 – 35.
NOTE! The below description is not valid for Input 2 on the 4583DE
board. Input 2 has special characteristics according to VdS 2105 and
can only be used for connection of the sabotage line from a German
key cabinet. See chapter “Inputs and outputs expansion board
4583DE”, page 31, for more information.
10.3.1
Not supervised
Normally open (R > 20K) or Normally closed (R < 500)
Activation time: > 10 sec.
10.3.2
Supervised
Each supervised input can be in different states.
Depending on the selected logic, Normally open (high resistance) or
Normally closed (low resistance), the following table is valid:
Line resistance R
Normally open
(high resistance)
Normally closed
(low resistance)
R > 4K
Fault; Open circuit
(cut-off)
Fault; Open circuit
(cut-off)
4K > R > 3K
(nom. 3K3)
Not activated
Activated
3K > R > 2K
Fault; Not allowed
Fault; Not allowed
2K > R > 70
(nom. 680)
Activated
Not activated
73
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
R < 70
10.3.2.1
Fault; Short-circuit
Fault; Short-circuit
Input line fault
If open circuit (cut-off) or short-circuit is detected on a supervised
input, a fault will be generated in EBL512 G3 and the following fault
message will be displayed:
FAULT: Input x expansion board x,
control unit xx
10.4
The 3361 unit's Inputs In0 / Z & In1
Connections, see drawings 512 G3 – 31 and – 36.
10.4.1
Input In0
Input 0 can be used as a general input (In0) – like the c.i.e. inputs I0I3 or used as a zone line input (Z) requiring an end-of-line capacitor
(10 μF).
10.4.2
Input In1
Input 1 is an isolated optocoupler input requiring a NO / NC contact
and external 24 V DC (8 mA).
74
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
11
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Input programming
Input programming is done via EBLWin. Each input has to have an
individual Trigger condition ("Type") and Logic. Some inputs can be
supervised or not supervised.
11.1
Trigger conditions
The following trigger conditions are available (numbering only for the
comments below):
0. Activate output (specified COM loop unit output)
1. Activated fault routing equipment (one input per C.U.)
2. Activated Fire Ventilation (one input per C.U.)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Activated key cabinet (one input per C.U.)
Activated Routing Equipment (one input per C.U.)
Alarm Key Cabinet (one input per control unit)
Alert Annunciation Acknowledge
Alert Annunciation Reset
Door Closing Test Input
Evacuate (one input per C.U.)
External Fault (max. 50 per C.U.)
External Time Channel (one input per time channel. 49 ext.
time channels (e.g. 1-49) are available per system)
12. Extinguishing alarm
13. Extinguishing start 64
14. Extinguishing stop 64
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Extinguishing system fault (one input per C.U.)
Extinguishing system released (one input per C.U.)
Fault Signal External Fuses (one input per control unit)
Fault Signal External Power Supply (one input per control unit)
Fault warning routing equipment fault (one input per C.U.)
General Fire (max. 127 per C.U.)
Interlocking (400 inputs per C.U. / 4000 per system)
Loss of battery charger to external power supply (one input per
C.U.)
23. Loss of main power source to external power supply (one input
per C.U.)
24. Not used
25. NZ Silence switch65 (one input per system)
64
All inputs and outputs involved have to be connected to the same c.i.e.
65
Only valid for the New Zealand convention.
75
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
26. Pre-warning (input and corresponding fire alarm input have to be
"connected" to the same C.U.)
27. Technical warning (max. 100 per C.U.)
28. Zone Line Input66
Comments to the trigger conditions (above):
0. This trigger condition should be used together with a
programmable COM loop unit output in order to test / activate
the output via this input. The output is active as long as the input
is active. This is valid even if the output is disabled.
1. "Activated Fault routing equipment" signal (feed-back) to
EBL512 G3 will light up the LED "Fault tx activated" on the
front.
Output with trigger condition "Indication Fault tx
Activated" will be activated.67
2. Activated Ventilation equipment feedback to the EBL512 control
unit to light up the LED "Ventilation".68
3. Output with trigger condition "Activated Key cabinet" will be
activated.
4. Activated Fire brigade tx feedback to the EBL512 G3 control unit
to light up the LED "Fire brigade tx".68
5. If the Key cabinet, where the fire brigade store the key(s) to the
building, is opened when no fire alarm is activated, will activate a
Key cabinet alarm. See EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions for
more information.
6. Alert annunciation, see chapter "Alert Annunciation", page 122
and EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions for more information.
7. Like 6.
8. When one or more "Fire door closing" outputs are used, these
outputs will be activated for 20 seconds by this trigger condition.
NOTE! Only valid for inputs and outputs connected to the same
c.i.e.
9. Normally used for the New Zealand key switch "Evacuation".
The function is like the soft key "Evacuate" (P7)69 on the c.i.e.
front. The input has to be activated as long as the Evacuate
function shall be on.
66
Only valid for the Addressable multipurpose I/O unit 3361 input "In0",
used as zone line input (Z).
67
One input activated in any control unit, will light up the LED respectively
in all control units.
68
One input activated in a control unit, will light up the LED in that control
unit.
69
Available in some conventions only.
76
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
10. Ext. fault will activate a fault in EBL512 G3. A user definable
fault message ("Error text") up to 40 characters will be shown.
11. External clock, timer, key switch, etc. can disable / re-enable
alarm points. The function Alert Annunciation, etc. can be turned
on / off by a time channel. Control outputs can be turned on / off
by a time channel.
12. Activated input will activate a fire alarm (Zone), e.g. a sprinkler
zone alarm. This trigger condition is normally used for a 3361
unit monitored Input 0 used as a Zone line input (end-of-line
capacitor) and as the type "Extinguishing".
13. Used to start a new "countdown", see 14 below.
Push button: NO, momentary action. One or more push buttons
can be used.
14. Output for Extinguishing equipment (type of output = 2) has to
have a delayed activation programmed (a "countdown"). This
"countdown" will be stopped when an input with trigger condition
14 is activated. To start a new "countdown", see 13 above.
Push button info: NO, latching action. One or more push buttons
can be used. Manual reset of push button(s).
15. Activated input will generate a fault in EBL512 G3. Output with
trigger condition "Extinguishing system fault" will be activated.
The following fault message will be shown:
FAULT: Extinguishing system,
control unit xx
16. Activated Extinguishing equipment feedback to the EBL512 G3
control unit to light up the LED "Extinguishing".68
17. Ext. fuses (for ext. power supply equipment) fault output will
activate a fault in the EBL512 G3 system. The following fault
message will be shown:
FAULT: External fuses, control unit xx
18. Ext. power supply equipment fault output will activate a fault in
the EBL512 G3 system. The following fault message will be
shown:
FAULT: External power supply,
control unit xx
19. Activated input (i.e. fault on the fault routing equipment) will
generate a fault in EBL512 G3:
FAULT: Fault warning routing equipment,
control unit xx
20. A special detector, push button, sprinkler flow switch, etc. can
activate a fire alarm in EBL512 G3. Zone no. and Address (+ user
definable alarm text).
21. A feed-back from the equipment activated by the corresponding
interlocking output. Activated input is shown in menu H9/C1.
See also chapter "Interlocking function", page 104.
77
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
22. "Loss of the battery charger to external power supply equipment"
fault output will activate a fault in the EBL512 G3 system. It will
have the same time delay, as set for the Loss of main power
source fault for the c.i.e. The following fault message will be
shown:
FAULT: Charging external power supply,
control unit xx
23. "Loss of main power source to external power supply equipment"
fault output will activate a fault in the EBL512 G3 system. It will
have the same time delay, as set for the Loss of main power
source fault for the c.i.e. The following fault message will be
shown:
FAULT: Mains, external power supply,
control unit xx
24. Default. Indicating that an input trigger condition is not selected,
i.e. the input will not "activate" anything.
25. Used for the "outside switch" (i.e. the New Zealand FB silence
switch). Turned on: Alarm devices and the c.i.e. buzzer will be
disabled. The following fault message will be shown:
FAULT: FB Silence switch,
control unit xx
From Turned on to Turned off: All fire alarms will be isolated,
all zones in alarm will be disabled, alarm devices and the c.i.e.
buzzer will be re-enabled and the fault will be serviced.
26. Pre-warning, e.g. from a High Sensitive Smoke Detector's prewarning output. Zone no. and Address have to be set to the same
as the corresponding fire alarm (from the same detector).
27. A technical warning is neither an alarm nor a fault. It is activated
as long as the input is activated, which is indicated by a symbol
in the display. Identified via menu H4/U6. Output with trigger
condition "Technical warning (+name)" will be activated.
28. The Addressable multipurpose I/O unit 3361 monitored Input 0
used as zone line input (Z), i.e. with end-of-line capacitor.
11.2
Logic
The logic has to be set. 70
(•) Normally open / normally low
normally low optocoupler input.
Normally open contact or
( ) Normally closed / normally high Normally closed contact or
normally high optocoupler input.
70
In the EBLWin dialog box "Input".
78
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
11.2.1
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Supervised
Valid for the Inputs and Outputs expansion board (4583) programmable inputs (Input 0-4) only.
(•) Normally open (high resistance)
( ) Normally closed (low resistance)
Depending on the selected logic, Normally open (high resistance,
3K3) or Normally closed (low resistance, 680R), the function will be
according to the table on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
79
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
12
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Programmable outputs
In each control unit are four programmable voltage outputs (S0-S3)
and two programmable relay outputs (R0-R1) available. 8 relays
expansion boards (4581) and Input and Output expansion board
(4583) with three programmable outputs (Output 0-2) can be mounted
in each EBL512 G3. See chapter "Expansion boards 458x", page 26.
On the COM loops can be connected Addressable Multipurpose I/O
units (3361) with two programmable relay outputs (Re0-Re1) per unit
and Addressable 2 voltage outputs units (3364). Addressable siren
(3377 / 4477), Addressable sounder base (3379), Addressable beacon
(4380) and Light indicator (4383) can also be connected on the COM
loops, i.e. the units have no physical outputs, only siren, sounder and
light respectively. Also the Wireless smoke detector (4611) has a
sounder.
Each output is programmed via EBLWin, see dialog boxes below.
Figure 12. EBLWin Control unit Voltage Output and Relay
Output dialog boxes.
Each 3377 and 3379 unit is programmed via EBLWin, see dialog box
examples below.
80
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Figure 13. EBLWin "Addressable siren 3377" dialog box. The
dialog box for "Addressable sounder base 3379" is similar.
Test of outputs
When a PC is connected to a control unit, EBLWin open and you are
logged on, each output can be activated / de-activated.
12.1
Control unit outputs S0 – S3
Each control unit has four programmable, supervised (monitored)71
voltage outputs:
S0
Supervised (monitored) voltage output, 24V DC, max. 500 mA
(Fuse F4)
S1
Supervised (monitored) voltage output, 24V DC, max. 500 mA
(Fuse F5)
S2
Supervised (monitored) voltage output, 24V DC, max. 500 mA
(Fuse F6)
S372 Supervised (monitored) voltage output, 24V DC, max. 500 mA
(Fuse F7)
NOTE! For EN54-13 compliance, connections have to be according
to dwg 512 G3 – 23, sheet 2, i.e. only one alarm device can be used (<
15 mA) and one 1K end-of-line resistor. Programmed as normally
low and supervised. .
See also chapter "Programmable voltage outputs (S0-S3)", page 24.
71
This is default, but via EBLWin it is possible to set each output
individually as not supervised (not monitored). A normally high output is not
supervised. See also chapter "Calibration of supervised outputs", page 128.
72
Note! This output will be low in case of system fault (via the watch dog
reset circuit). May be used as a supervised voltage output for fault warning
routing equipment (Fault tx).
81
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
12.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Control unit outputs R0 & R1
Each control unit has two programmable relay outputs. Relay contact
ratings: 30 V, 1A.
R0
R1
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Connections and more information, see dwg. 512 G3 - 23.
12.3
8 relays expansion board 4581 Output 0 –
Output 7
Each 4581 board has eight programmable relay outputs:
Output 0
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Relay contact ratings: Max. 2A @ 30 V DC.
Connections and more information, see dwg. 512 G3 – 34.
12.4
Inputs and Outputs expansion board 4583
Output 0 & Output 1
Expansion board 4583 has
(monitored)73 voltage outputs:
two
programmable,
supervised
Output 0 Supervised (monitored) voltage output, 24V DC74, max.
200 mA (Fuse F1).
Output 1 Supervised (monitored) voltage output, 24V DC74, max.
200 mA (Fuse F2).
Connections and more information, see drawing 512 G3 – 35, sheet 1.
See also chapter "Inputs and outputs expansion board 4583", page 30.
12.5
Inputs and Outputs expansion board
4583DE Output 0 & Output 1
Expansion board 4583 has
(monitored)73 voltage outputs:
two
programmable,
supervised
73
This is default, but via EBLWin it is possible to set each output
individually as not supervised (not monitored). A normally high output is not
supervised. See also chapter "Calibration of supervised outputs", page 128.
74
See chapter "Technical data", page 192, regarding system voltage.
82
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Output 0 Supervised (monitored)
200 mA (Fuse F1). This output is
routing equipment.
Output 1 Supervised (monitored)
200 mA (Fuse F2). This output is
routing equipment.
voltage output, 24V DC, max.
intended for German fire alarm
voltage output, 24V DC, max.
intended for German fire alarm
Connections and more information, see drawing 512 G3 – 35, sheet 3.
See also chapter "Inputs and outputs expansion board 4583DE", page
31.
NOTE! 24 V DC is the nominal voltage when the main power supply
is used. When the second power supply (back-up battery) is used the
voltage can be 21.6-28 V DC on board 4583DE.
12.6
The 3361 unit's Outputs Re0 & Re1
Each 3361 unit has two programmable relay outputs. Relay contact
ratings: 30 V DC (125 V AC), 2A.
Re0 Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Re1 Relay output, NO or NC contacts programmable
Connections and more information, see dwg. 512 G3 – 36.
12.7
The 3364 unit's VO0 – VO2
Each 3364 unit has two programmable, supervised (monitored)71
voltage outputs:
Output VO0 Supervised (monitored) voltage output, 24V DC75
Output VO1 Supervised (monitored) voltage output, 24V DC75
Each 3364 unit also has one programmable special output, intended
for fire door closing (release magnets) only:
Output VO2 Voltage output, 24 V DC, max. 1A75. Normally high.
For more information see the Technical Description MEW00529.
24 V DC is required from an external power supply unit (e.g. 3366).
Connections and more information, see dwg. 512 G3 – 31 & - 38.
12.8
The 3377 / 4477 unit's Output (siren)
Each 3377 / 4477 unit has three programmable outputs, i.e. three
priority levels and three types of tones:
Output Siren
High priority / Medium priority / Low priority
Connections and more information, see dwg. 512 G3 – 31.
75
Cont. 1 A, during 10 ms 1.4 A.
83
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
12.9
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The 3379 unit's Output (sounder)
Each 3379 unit has three programmable outputs, i.e. three priority
levels and three types of tones:
Output Sounder
High priority / Medium priority / Low priority
Also "High sound output" can be selected for additional 4.5 dB.
Connections and more information, see dwg. 512 G3 – 31.
12.10
The 4380 unit's Output (beacon)
Each 4380 unit76 has one programmable output:
Output Beacon
(Light output 1 Cd. Flash rate 1 Hz.)
Connections and more information, see dwg. 512 G3 – 31.
NOTE! This unit is no longer to be found in Panasonic's product
range.
12.11
The 4383 unit's Output (light)
Each 4383 unit has one programmable output:
Output Light indicator
12.12
(Flash rate 1 Hz.)
The 4611 wireless smoke detector Output
(sounder)
Each 4611 detector has three programmable outputs, i.e. three priority
levels and three types of tones:
Output Sounder
76
High priority / Medium priority / Low priority
This unit is no longer in our product range.
84
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
13
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Output programming
Output programming is done in EBLWin. See the EBLWin dialog
box respectively.
13.1
Type of output
Some output types can be collective disabled. Some output types can
when activated, be indicated by an LED. The following types are
available (numbering only for the comments below):
0. Control
1. Fire Ventilation
2. Extinguishing
3. Alarm Device
4. Routing equipment (Fire brigade tx)
5. Control, neutral
6. Interlocking
Comments to the output types:
0. Default. General (normal) control output77
1. Used to activate fire ventilation equipment77,78
2. Used to activate extinguishing equipment77,79
3. Used for sounders, etc.80
4. Used for fire brigade tx outputs only81
5. General (normal) control output. No collective disablement and
no LED indication.
6. This output77 can be used together with a corresponding
interlocking input. See chapter "Interlocking function", page 104.
Activated output is shown in menu H9/C1.
77
Controlled by menu H2/B3 Disable / Re-enable output type.
78
Activated output is indicated by the LED "Ventilation". (Feedback from
the fire ventilation equipment to a programmable input can instead light up
the LED).
79
Activated output is indicated by the LED "Extinguishing". (Feedback from
the fire extinguishing equipment to a programmable input can instead light
up the LED).
80
Controlled by menu H2/B4 Disable / Re-enable Alarm devices and by
push button "Silence alarm devices" on the control unit front. Output fault /
disabled is indicated by LED Fault / Disablements "Alarm devices" blinking
/ continuous on.
81
Activated according to its control expression (trigger cond. 43 Indication
Fire brigade tx activated must not be used). Disabled like the standard
control unit "Fire brigade tx" relay output. Activated output is indicated by
the LED "Fire brigade tx". (Feedback from the Fire brigade tx to a
programmable input can instead light up the LED). Output fault / disabled is
indicated by LED Fault / Disablements "Fire brigade tx" blinking /
continuous on.
NOTE! When the Alert Annunciation function shall be used the following
trigger condition has to be added to the control expression:
&!Alert Annunciation activated. ("&!") is the same as "and not".
85
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
13.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Logic
(•) Normally open / low Normally open relay contact or normally
low voltage output. 82
( ) Normally closed / high Normally closed relay contact or
normally high voltage output (24V DC).83
13.3
Supervised / Not supervised
A voltage output is supervised (default). By unmarking the
"Supervised" checkbox the voltage output will be not supervised.
A normally high output cannot be supervised.
13.4
Output signal period
Each output uses an "Output signal period", which controls the
output's activation. The following are available:
User defined 1-8 can be built up with type and time.
Types:
0. Steady (continuous)
1. Intermittent
2. Pulse
3. Steady, Delayed Activation
4. Intermittent, Delayed Activation
5. Pulse, Delayed Activation
6. Steady, Delayed De-Activation
Times:
 Delay time (when required)
 Pulse length time (when required)
 Pulse off time (when required)
 De-activation time (when required)
82
The logic is set in the EBLWin dialog box "Voltage / Relayed Output".
83
The logic is set in the EBLWin dialog box "Voltage / Relayed Output".
NOTE! A normally high output can not be supervised and it will be low for
a few seconds during restart of the c.i.e.
86
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Regarding the programming, see chapter "Output Signal Periods",
page 162.
Figure 14. Delay time, Pulse length, Pulse off and/or DeActivation, have to be set for the type respectively.
NOTE! The different types can be used together with the different
outputs according to the following table:
87
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
In EBL512 G3
Output
S0-S3
R0,
R1
4581
board
COM loop units
4583
board
I/O unit
Unit
Siren,
4582
Inter
3361
3364
S/B &
board
locking
Beacon
& Light
Type
ind
3377,
3379,
4380/83
& 4611
0 Steady (continuous)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 Intermittent
X
X
XXX
--
--
XX
--
--
--
2 One pulse
X
X
XXX
--
XXXX
XXXX
--
--
--
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XXX
--
--
XX
--
--
--
X
X
XXX
--
XXXX
XXXX
--
--
--
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
--
3 Steady (continuous),
delayed activation
4 Intermittent,
delayed activation
5 One pulse,
delayed activation
6 Steady (continuous),
delayed de-activation
Figure 15. The types that can be used in the "Output signal
period" for the programmable output respectively
X = Output type can be used. XX = Output type can be used
but only 0.8s/0.8s. XXX = Output type can be used but max.
5.6s/5.6s and the pulse max. 5.6s respectively. XXXX = Output
type can be used but the pulse length will always be about 7s.
88
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
13.5
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Control expression
Each programmable output has to be given a control expression. It is
created by so called Boolean algebra.
Note that a programmable output with no control expression will be
interpreted by the c.i.e. as if it does not exist. If an output is to be used
for manual control only, e.g. a fan control output or an output
controlled by input trigger condition ‘Activate output’, a ‘never true’
control expression must be programmed. In such a case control
expression TimeChannelActivated (‘Always off’) can be used.
Trigger conditions (see "Available functions"), logical "Operators"
(AND, OR, NOT) and parentheses are used to make a "control
expression" containing up to 40 trigger conditions. See also chapter
"Control expression examples" page 96.
A programmable output will be activated as long as its control
expression is true.
Figure 16. In any output dialog box, click the right mouse
button in the large white field. Select Alarm, Interlocking,
Disablement or Other to open a "Trigger conditions list".
Depending on the selected trigger condition, different
arguments / data have to be entered. In the figure is the trigger
condition "General Fire Alarm" selected.
13.5.1
Trigger conditions
Some trigger conditions require additional information, see
information within parentheses (+nnnnn) after the trigger condition
respectively below.
The trigger conditions are divided into four groups as follows:
Alarm
Interlocking
89
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Disablement
Other
The numbering of the trigger conditions is only for "the comments to
the trigger conditions" below:
13.5.1.1
Alarm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Fire Alarm Zone (+Zone no.)
Fire Alarm Zone Address (+Zone no.+Address)
General Fire Alarm
Consecutive Fire Alarm (sequence) (+start Zone no. and
address +stop Zone no. and address +Quantity)
Pre Warning Zone (+Zone no.)
Pre Warning Zone Address (+Zone no.+Address)
General Pre Warning
Consecutive Pre Warning (+start Zone no. and address
+stop Zone no. and address +Quantity)
Heavy Smoke Alarm Zone (+Zone no.)
Heavy Smoke Alarm Zone Address (+Zone
no.+Address)
General Heavy Smoke Alarm
Consecutive Heavy Smoke Alarm (sequence) (+start
Zone no. and address +stop Zone no. and address
+Quantity)
Two Address Dependent Fire Alarm (+Zone no.
+Address)
Two Zone Dependent Fire Alarm (+Zone no.)
Multiple Detector Alarm
One Detector Alarm
Key Cabinet Alarm
LAA Zone Alarm (+LAA Zone no.)
Quiet Alarm Zone (+Zone no.)
Quiet Alarm Zone Address (+Zone no. +Address)
General Fire Alarm Reset
Delayed Alarm Zone Address (+Zone no. +Address)
Delayed Alarm Zone (+Zone no.)
General Delayed Alarm
First Zone In Alarm Control Unit (+Zone no. +Control
Unit no.)
First Zone In Alarm Zone Group (+Zone no. +Zone
Group name)
Pre Warning Zone Group (+Zone Group name
+Quantity)
Fire Alarm Zone Group (+Zone Group name
+Quantity)
Heavy Smoke Alarm Zone Group (+Zone Group name
+Quantity)
90
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
13.5.1.2
Interlocking
30
31
32
33
13.5.1.3
Interlocking Input Area Activated (+Area no.)
Interlocking Input Area Point Activated (+Area no.
+Point)
General Interlocking Input Activated
Consecutive Interlocking Input Activated (sequence)
(+start Area no. and point +stop Area no. and point
+Quantity)
Disablement
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
13.5.1.4
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Fire Brigade Tx Disabled
Zone Disabled (+Zone no.)
Zone Address Disabled (+Zone no. +Address)
General Zone Address Disabled
All Control Disabled
All Alarm Devices Disabled
Control Disabled Control Unit (+Control unit)
Alarm Device Disabled Control Unit (+Control unit)
General Disablement
Other
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Indication Fire Brigade Tx Activated
Indication Fault Tx Activated
General Fault
General Mains Fault
Reset Pulse Zone Address (+Zone no. +Address) 84
Time Channel Activated (+Time channel name / no.)
Alert Annunciation Activated
Alert Annunciation Acknowledged
Door Open
Fire Door Closing (+Zone no. +Address)
General Service Signal
Fire brigade Tx
Door Open Control Unit (+Control unit)
Extinguishing System Fault
Extinguishing System Released
Activated Key Cabinet
Fault Control Unit (+Control unit)
Consecutive Fault Control Unit (+start Control unit and
stop Control unit)
Zone Fault (+Zone no.)
External Fault (+ext. fault)
Technical Warning (+techn. warning)
General Technical Warning
Comments to the trigger conditions (functions):
84
Not valid for the 3364 outputs (VO0-VO2).
91
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Alarm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Fire alarm. For more information regarding fire alarm,
see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777.
Output is activated when the specified Zone is in alarm.
See 1. Output is activated when the specified alarm point
is in alarm.
See 1. Output is activated when any alarm point or Zone
is in alarm.
See 1. Quantity (1-9): "1" means one unit in alarm is
required, "2" means two units in alarm are required to
activate the output and so on.
Pre-warning.85 For more information regarding prewarning, see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions
MEW01777. Output is activated when the specified
Zone is over the pre-warning level.
See 5. Output is activated when the specified alarm point
is over the pre-warning level.
See 5. Output is activated when any alarm point or Zone
is over the pre-warning level.
See 5. See also 4. above regarding "Quantity".
Heavy smoke / heat alarm. For more information
regarding heavy smoke / heat alarm, see EBL512 G3
Operating Instructions MEW01777. Output is activated
when the specified Zone is over the heavy smoke / heat
level.
See 9. Output is activated when the specified alarm point
is over the heavy smoke / heat level.
See 9. Output is activated when any alarm point is over
the heavy smoke / heat level.
See 9. See also 4. above regarding "Quantity".
Output is activated when only one address (in twoaddress dependence) is in fire alarm state. For more
information, see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions
MEW01777.
Output is activated when only one zone (in two-zone
dependence) is in fire alarm state. For more information,
see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777.
Output activated when "Multiple detector alarm" is true,
i.e. fire alarm type A.86
Output activated when "One detector alarm" is true, i.e.
fire alarm type B86.
85
The trigger condition is true as long as the pre-warning level is exceeded.
It is also true as long as the fire alarm level is exceeded even if the option
pre-warning detection is disabled (via EBLWin).
86
See chapter "Fire alarm type A and Fire alarm type B", page 123.
92
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
General Key cabinet alarm activated.
For more
information, see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions
MEW01777.
Local Alarm Acknowledgement. "Alarm" is activated in
the specified LAA zone.
Output activated for any "Quiet alarm" in the specified
zone. Used e.g. for the fan control function.
Output activated for one specified "Quiet alarm" in the
specified zone-address. Used e.g. for the fan control
function.
This control expression is true (i.e. output activated) for
15 seconds after the last alarm is reset.
Output is activated during the delay of the specified
Zone-Address. (Delay time set in EBLWin, System
Properties.)
Output is activated during the delay of the specified
Zone. (Delay time set in EBLWin, System Properties.)
Output is activated during the delay of any Zone or ZoneAddress in the system. (Delay time set in EBLWin,
System Properties.)
Output is activated only if the first alarm is an alarm in
the specified Zone in the specified Control Unit.
NOTE! This is not valid for manual call points.
Output is activated only if the first alarm is an alarm in
the specified Zone in the specified Zone Group.
Pre-warning. For more information regarding prewarning, see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions
MEW01777. Output is activated when any of the alarm
points in the specified Zone Group is over the prewarning level. See also 4. above regarding "Quantity".
Fire alarm. For more information regarding fire alarm,
see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777.
Output is activated when any of the alarm points in the
specified Zone Group is in alarm. See also 4. above
regarding "Quantity".
Heavy smoke / heat alarm. For more information
regarding heavy smoke / heat alarm, see EBL512 G3
Operating Instructions MEW01777. Output is activated
when any of the alarm points in the specified Zone Group
is over the heavy smoke / heat level. See also 4. above
regarding "Quantity".
Interlocking
30
31
32
Output activated when one or more interlocking inputs, in
the specified interlocking area, are activated.
Output activated when the interlocking input, in the
specified interlocking area/point, is activated.
Output activated when any interlocking input is activated.
93
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
33
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Output activated when interlocking inputs, in the
specified range, are activated (from interlocking area
no./point to interlocking area no./point). See also 4.
above regarding "Quantity".
Disablement
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Output activated when any Routing equipment output
(Fire brigade tx) is disabled.87
Output activated when the specified zone is disabled.88
Output activated when the specified alarm point (zoneaddress) is disabled.88
Output activated when any alarm point (zone-address) or
zone is disabled. 88
The control expression is true (output activated) when all
control outputs of the types Control, Fire ventilation
and Extinguishing in all control units are disabled via
menu H2/B388. This output shall be type Control –
neutral.
The control expression is true (output activated) when all
control outputs of type Alarm device in all control units
are disabled via menu H2/B489. This output shall be type
Control – neutral.
The control expression is true (output activated) when all
control outputs of the types Control, Fire ventilation
and Extinguishing in the specified control unit are
disabled via menu H2/B3.88 This output shall be type
Control – neutral.
The control expression is true (output activated) when all
control outputs of type Alarm device in the specified
control unit are disabled via menu H2/B4). This output
shall be type Control – neutral.
The control expression is true (output activated) when
any disablement exists in the system.88
Other
43
87
88
The control expression is true (output activated) when
LED "Fire brigade tx" is lit, i.e. when any "Fire brigade
tx" output is activated (default) or when a programmable
input with trigger cond. "Activated Routing Equipment"
Which is indicated by LED Fault / Disablements "Fire brigade tx".
Which is indicated
Disablements".
89
by
LED
Fault
/
Disablements
"General
Which is indicated by LED Fault / Disablements "Alarm devices".
94
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
is activated.90 Used for example when an ext. LED "Fire
brigade tx" is required.
The control expression is true (output activated) when
LED "Fault tx activated" is lit, i.e. when the routing
equipment output (Fault tx) is activated.91
Output activated when one or more faults are generated
in the system.92
Output activated for loss of mains (in a c.i.e. or external
power supply 3366).93 NOTE! The output(s) will be
activated immediately but the corresponding fault is
normally delayed (set via EBLWin).
The control expression is true (output activated) for 5
seconds, whenever a reset pulse is sent to the specified
Zone-Address. The control expression can only be used
in the same c.i.e. as the specified Zone-Address.
Output activated when the specified time channel is
activated.
Output activated when Alert annunciation alarm is
activated (by any alarm point set to activate this
function).94 For more information, see EBL512 G3
Operating Instructions MEW01777.
Output activated when Alert annunciation alarm is
activated (by any alarm point set to activate this
function)94 and acknowledged. For more information,
see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777.
Output activated for Door open in any control unit in the
system.95
This trigger condition plus the OR operator shall be used
for each detector (Zone-Address) controlling a fire door
(normally > two detectors). Type of output is normally
"Control, neutral".96 Output activated, see chapter "Fire
Door Closing", page 108.
90
This output will also be activated when the routing equipment test is
performed via menu H1. This trigger condition must not be used for type of
output "Routing equipment (Fire brigade tx)".
91
Which is indicated by LED Routing equipment "Fault tx activated". This
output will also be activated when the routing equipment test is performed
via menu H1.
92
Which is indicated by LED Fault / Disablements "General fault" and/or
LED Routing equipment "Fault tx activated".
93
Which is indicated by a symbol
94
Valid until the AA alarm is reset or becomes a normal fire alarm.
95
Which is indicated by a symbol
96
in the c.i.e. display.
in the c.i.e. display.
In Danish convention (DBI), must only the c.i.e. outputs R0-R1 and S0-S3
be used (or COM loop unit 3364) and the type has to be "control neutral".
95
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
13.5.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Output activated when Service signal is activated (by any
sensor).97
The control expression is true (output activated) when the
control unit standard output "Fire brigade tx" is activated.
Used for example when a standard "Fire brigade tx"
voltage output is required. Used with output type
Routing equipment (Fire brigade tx).
NOTE! If the control unit has "selective fire alarm
presentation", the standard output(s) will also be
selectively activated.
Output activated for Door open in the specified control
unit.95
Output activated when input trigger condition
"Extinguishing system fault" is true.
Output activated when input trigger condition
"Extinguishing system released" is true.
Output activated when input trigger condition "Activated
key cabinet" is true.
Output activated when one or more faults are generated
in the specified control unit.92
Output activated when one or more faults, in the
specified range (from control unit to control unit), are
generated.92
Output activated when one or more faults are generated
in the specified Zone.92
Output activated when the specified external fault is
generated.92
Output activated when the specified technical warning is
generated.98
Output activated when one or more technical warnings
are generated.
Logical operators
The logical operators available in EBLWin are in priority order:
13.5.3
( )
parentheses, changes priority order
NOT
not-function (inverts), is written NOT in EBLWin
AND
and-function, is written AND in EBLWin
OR
or-function, is written OR in EBLWin
Control expression examples
In order to understand the possibilities to create control expressions,
here follow some AND, OR, NOT and ( ) examples and also some
control expression examples.
97
Indicated by a symbol
in the c.i.e. display.
98
Indicated by a symbol
in the c.i.e. display.
96
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
13.5.3.1
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
AND
a AND b AND c=y
y is true (=1) when all the conditions a, b, c are true, i.e. a=1 and b=1
and c=1 makes y=1. All other combinations makes y=0.
This is also shown in the following table:
13.5.3.2
a
b
c
y
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
OR
a OR b OR c=y
y is true if at least one of the conditions a, b, c is true, i.e. a=1 or b=1
or c=1 makes y=1.
This is also shown in the following table:
97
a
b
c
y
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
13.5.3.3
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
NOT
Inverts a condition, e.g. NOT b = NOT 0=1.
a OR NOT b AND c = y
This is shown in the following table:
13.5.3.4
a
b
c
y
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Parentheses
Changes priority order.
a OR NOT( b AND c ) = y
completed with parentheses.)
(This is same as the previous but
This is shown in the following table:
98
a
b
c
y
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
13.5.3.5
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Control expressions
The AND operator has priority, i.e. a AND b OR c = (a AND b) OR c.
This is perhaps more obvious if you write it: a • b + c.
This means that: a AND b OR c ≠ a AND (b OR c).
Here follows some examples (and explanations) to show the principles
how to build a control expression with "conditions" and logical
operators.):
Example 1
Output:
Voltage output S0
Control expression:
Pre Alarm Zone (90)
Explanation:
Pre-warning activated in zone no. 90 will
activate the output S0.
Example 2
Output:
Relay output R1
Control expression:
General Control Off ( ) AND NOT Door
Open (01)
Explanation:
Controls OFF (via menu H2/B4) will
activate the output R1 when the door in
control unit 01 is not open (i.e. closed).
Example 3
Output:
Relay output R0
Control expression:
Fire Alarm Zone (145) AND Fire Alarm
Zone (045) AND General Fault ( )
Explanation:
Fire alarm activated in zone 145 and zone 45
will activate the output R0 when there are
one ore more faults in the system at the same
time.
Example 4
Output:
Voltage output S1
Control expression:
Consecutive Fire Alarm (100,10,100,19,1)
OR
Consecutive Fire Alarm (100,21,100,40,1)
99
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Explanation:
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Fire alarm activated by one of the alarm
points in zone 100 address 10-19 or
activated by one of the alarm points in zone
100 address 21-40 will activate the output
S1 (i.e. alarm point address 20 in zone 100
will not activate the output S1).
100
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
14
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Short circuit isolators
4313 Analog base with isolator has a built-in isolator that requires a
separate COM loop address and a Sequence Number, 00-63.
The units 4433, 4439 and 4477 have a built-in isolator that do not
require any separate COM loop address, only a Sequence Number,
00-63. As an option, these units can be used without the isolator in
function. If so, they have to be programmed in EBLWin as if they
were 3333, 3339 and 3377 units and via the Address setting tool 4413
set to 2330 mode instead of NORMAL mode.
The unit 4620 has a built-in isolator that do not require any separate
COM loop address, only a Sequence Number, 00-63.
A break or short circuit on a COM loop has to generate a fault in the
control unit within 60-100 seconds (EN54-2 requirement).
If one or more short circuit isolators are used99, the loop will be
divided into "segments" (i.e. the part between two short circuit
isolators or between the control unit and one short circuit isolator).
Only the affected segment will be isolated, which will minimise the
number of units disabled by a short circuit.
The fault messages will also show between which isolators the short
circuit is situated.
Figure 17. The first isolator (ISO) in the A-direction has to have
the sequence no. 0 (ISO no. 0), the next sequence no. 1 and so
on. The sequence no. is programmed via EBLWin.
If no short circuit isolators are used, the whole COM loop will be
disabled in case of short circuit on the loop.
As from version 2.1.x, the communication (and power supply)
direction will alternate every 22nd second.
99
One short circuit isolator per 32 alarm points is required according to
EN54-2.
101
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
COM loop end-point voltage100 <12 V DC or COM loop short
circuit or COM loop break(s):
This will start a "cycle" as follows.
- The whole loop will be disabled, i.e. no voltage on the loop which
means that all isolator relays will be powerless (= all isolators
disabled), i.e. there will be a “break” on the L (SA) wire in each
isolator.
- A control unit algorithm will now try to re-enable the first isolator in
the A-direction (ISO no. 0 / sequence no. 0). If this is possible, the
next isolator in the A-direction (ISO no. 1 / sequence no. 1) will be reenabled, if this is possible. And so on. The isolator just before a short
circuit cannot be re-enabled.
- The control unit algorithm will now try to re-enable the first isolator
in the B-direction (ISO no. 3 / sequence no. 3 in Figure 17). If this is
possible, the next isolator in the B-direction, and so on.
- Finally all isolators will be re-enabled except the isolator on each
side of a short circuit and any isolator(s) between two or more breaks
on the loop.
- Communication will be in both directions for 10 minutes. Then a
new “cycle” starts.
- If the “fault(s)” are not corrected, the communication will be in both
directions for another 10 minutes when a new “cycle” starts, and so
on.
- If the “fault(s)” are corrected, the communication will return to be in
the A-direction only.
Depending on if it is too low voltage on the loop, short circuit, one
break or two or more breaks, the fault messages will be different.

FAULT: Cut-off loop x, control unit xx SCI
nn <-> SCI nn
NOTE! nn = A, 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15 - - up to 63 or B.

FAULT: Short circuit loop x, control unit xx
SCI nn <-> SCI nn
NOTE! nn = A, 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15 - - up to 63or B.
If there are multiple loop faults, i.e. one or more short circuits and/or
one or more Cut-offs, there will be a “multiple COM loop fault”
message.

100
FAULT: Multiple faults, COM loop x,
control unit xx
When communicating in the A-direction.
102
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The first fault message will show the first fault in the A-direction.
There will always be a “no reply” message for all units not found in
spite of communication in both directions.
 FAULT: No reply zone: xxx address xx
technical number xxxxxx
Alarm text for xxx-xx
Regarding Fault acknowledge, see the EBL512 G3 Operating
Instructions MEW01777.
NOTE! After the faults are acknowledged it can take up to 10
minutes before the faults will disappear from the fault list, since the
check ("cycle") starts every 10th minute.
103
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
15
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Interlocking function
The interlocking function is used to verify that an output really is
activated, i.e. by "combining" an output with an input (feed-back from
the equipment controlled by the corresponding interlocking output).
15.1
Programming of interlocking function
EBLWin is used for the programming. Up to 400 Interlocking
Combinations per c.i.e. can be used and up to 4000 in a system.
NOTE! One Interlocking Combination (the input, the output and the
area) has to be in / connected to one c.i.e. An input and an output can
only be used in one combination.
15.1.1
Interlocking output
The "Voltage Output" / "Relay Output" dialog boxes are used.
Type: "Interlocking" shall be selected.
Output signal period: Type Steady (continuous) or Type Steady,
delayed activation can be selected (checked by the "Validate" function
in EBLWin).
A Control Expression shall be programmed for the output, i.e. for the
equipment to be controlled.
Activated output will be indicated in menu H9/C1.
Name: The interlocking combination's presentation number (AreaPoint) could be added.
15.1.2
Interlocking input
The "Input" dialog box is used.
Type "Interlocking" shall be selected.
Activated input will be indicated in menu H9/C1.
Name: The interlocking combination's presentation number (AreaPoint) could be added.
15.1.3
Interlocking combination
One interlocking output and one interlocking input are programmed in
an interlocking combination to get the interlocking functions.
NOTE!
The interlocking outputs and inputs have to be programmed before the
programming of an interlocking combination is possible to do.101
(An interlocking combination can have only an output or only an input
programmed, e.g. when a user definable text message is wanted to
indicate an activated output or input.)
101
In the "Interlocking Combination" dialog box are listed all the outputs
and inputs previous programmed for interlocking, see Figure 18.
104
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Figure 18. EBLWin "Interlocking Combination" dialog box.
Name: Displayed in the EBLWin Tree and List views. Default is
"Interlocking Combination" that can be edited when wanted /
required. "Area-Point" will be added in the tree view. "Area-Point"
will be shown under "Zone-Address" in the list view.
The Available interlocking outputs list displays all the previous
programmed outputs, Type = "Interlocking".
The Available interlocking inputs list displays all the previous
programmed inputs, Type "Interlocking". Select one Output and one
Input. Press Select and the selected output and input will be shown in
the Selected output and Selected input field respectively.
It is possible to Remove the output / input (from the field).
It is possible to Find (open the dialog box) the output / input.
Output parent: Shows where the selected output is situated, e.g.
Control unit 0.
Input parent:
Control unit 0.
Shows where the selected input is situated, e.g.
Area and Point: Each "Interlocking Combination" is presented as
Area-Point (compare with Zone-Address). Area numbers 1-999 are
possible and within each Area, Point numbers 1-99 are possible to use.
An Area can only be used in one c.i.e.
Text = User definable text message to be shown in the menu H9/C1.
Can be written in this field or in the "Texts" dialog box, see chapter
"Creating the alarm texts via EBLWin", page 132.
105
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Buzzer checked = activated interlocking input will turn on the c.i.e.
buzzer (0.8 / 0.8 sec.)102. The buzzer can be silenced. It will be
automatically turned on again, if a new interlocking input is activated.
Latched output checked = Output reset has to be performed via menu
H9/C3. (Automatically output reset will not take place when the
control expression becomes false.).
Fault checked = Fault detection ON.
Fault Detection Time: If the input is not activated within 5-255
seconds after the output is activated103, a fault will be generated:
FAULT: Interlocking input AAA/PP
15.2
Interlocking indications
One or more activated Interlocking Combinations (interlocking output
and/or input) are listed in the c.i.e. display104:
Disabled interlocking output is indicated by the LED "Disablements".
15.3
Interlocking outputs and inputs (H9)
Menu H9 has the following sub menus.
15.3.1
Activated interlocking outputs / inputs (H9/C1)
In menu H9/C1 will information be shown as follows:
Interlocking area AAA point PP output active
User definable text message..
yyyy-mm-dd
hh:mm
or
Interlocking area AAA point PP input/output active
User definable text message..
yyyy-mm-dd
hh:mm
or
Interlocking area AAA point PP input active
User definable text message..
yyyy-mm-dd
hh:mm
AAA = Interlocking combination Area
PP = Interlocking combination Point within the Area
Date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm).
Use "↑" "↓" to scroll between several interlocking combinations.
102
Priority order: Fire alarm – Pre-warning - Interlocking - Fault.
103
After the end of the any delay time.
104
This indication has the lowest priority and will only be shown if the
display was empty.
106
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
15.3.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Activate / deactivate interlocking output (H9/C2)
Activate
Even if the control expression for an interlocking output is not
fulfilled (true), the output can be manually activated via this menu.
The "Interlocking Combination" (Area / Point) is to be entered to
activate the output. The corresponding interlocking input will be
"monitored" in the same way as if the output was activated by its
control expression.
Deactivate
Activated interlocking outputs are listed here. Use "↑" "↓" to scroll
between the "Interlocking Combinations" (Area / Point).
Interlocking output activated via its control expression and latched
output selected: The output has to be reset via this menu.
Interlocking output activated via its control expression and latched
output not selected: The output can be reset via this menu.
Interlocking output activated via this menu: The output has to be reset
via this menu.
15.3.3
Disable / re-enable interlocking output (H9/C3)
Disable
Interlocking outputs (i.e. Output Type = Interlocking) can be
individually disabled via this menu. NOTE! Not via menu H2/B2. A
disabled output will stay in (or return to) the normal condition for the
output respectively. The "Interlocking Combination" (i.e. Area /
Point) is to be entered to disable the output.
Via menu H2/B3 can all interlocking outputs in the system be disabled
/ re-enabled.
Re-enable
Interlocking outputs (i.e. Output Type = Interlocking) can be reenabled via this menu. NOTE! Not via menu H2/B2.
Disabled interlocking outputs are listed in this menu. Use "↑" "↓" to
scroll between the "Interlocking Combinations" (i.e. Area / Point) or
type it via the key-pad.
15.4
Interlocking control expressions
A programmable output control expression can contain "interlocking"
trigger conditions ("Functions") numbers 22-25 (see chapter "Control
expression", page 91), i.e. one or more outputs can be activated when
one or more interlocking inputs are activated.
107
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
16
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Fire Door Closing
Programmable outputs can be used for fire door closing.105 A special
trigger condition is available (Fire Door Closing.). Type of output is
normally "Control, neutral". One or more alarm points can control the
output, i.e. the detectors on both sides of the fire door.
NOTE! The alarm points and their "belonging" output have to be in /
connected to the same c.i.e.
In case of one of the following "events", the output will be activated,
i.e. the fire door will close:
 Fire alarm (any of the detectors controlling the fire door)
 Fire alarm in "Test mode" (any of the detectors controlling
the fire door)
 Fault (i.e. "no answer" from any of the detectors controlling
the fire door 106)
 Disablement (any of the detectors controlling the fire door,
the zone(s) involved or the COM loop involved)107
 A definite time every day, if programmed via EBLWin. The
output will be activated for 20 seconds.
 Via a programmable input (trigger condition "Door Closing
Test Input"). The output will be activated for 20 seconds.
The input has to be in / connected to the same c.i.e. as the
alarm points and their "belonging" output.
NOTE!
Zone line inputs (via 4580 or 3361) cannot be used for this type of
Fire Door Closing.
If a magnet contact is available, is it possible to get a "closed fire door
verification" via the Interlocking function. In this case, Type of
output has to be "Interlocking output". See also chapter "Interlocking
function", page 104.
105
In the DBI (Danish) convention, must only the c.i.e. outputs R0-R1 and
S0-S3 in the c.i.e. be used. Also the COM loop unit Addressable 2 voltage
outputs unit 3364 can be used. "Type of output" has to be "Control, neutral".
106
E.g. if the detector is faulty or if there are two breaks or short-circuit on
the COM loop.
107
If an I/O unit 3361 output is used, it is recommended, for safety reasons,
to not connect it to the same COM loop as the detectors controlling the fire
door.
108
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Functions / Services / Features
Some Functions / Services / Features require programming in
EBLWin, see chapter "PC programs ", page 16.
How to connect the PC and for more information, see chapters
"Download SSD", page 171 and "New system program (S/W) version
download", page 174.
The information in the following chapters 17.1 - 17.7 is valid for the
analog smoke detectors 430x / 440x in NORMAL mode.
Chapter 17.5 is valid for the analog heat detectors 3308 / 3309 in
NORMAL mode.
For the analog detectors 440x in Advanced mode, see chapter
"Advanced mode", page 138.
17.1
Sensor value
An analog smoke detector is like a "sensor". It detects its environment
at all times. Each detected analog value is, in the detector, converted
to a digital "sensor value", which for each individual detector, is
continuously picked up and evaluated by EBL512 G3. In Figure 19
the (digital) sensor values (during a certain time) are represented by
the graph "Working level".
17.2
Week average sensor value
Each hour, one sensor value is stored in a special memory (in EBL512
G3) and each week, these stored sensor values are used for a "week
average sensor value" calculation.108 This is done for each analog
smoke detector individually. In Figure 19 the (digital) week average
sensor values (during a certain time) are represented by the graph
"Week average sensor value" (B).
Each analog smoke detector has a default sensor value = 0.1 %/m and
a week average sensor value = 0.1 %/m (i.e. at Time = 0).
A "fire alarm offset" (value) is added to the week average sensor
value to get each detector's "Fire alarm level", i.e. the fire alarm level
will be adjusted in relation to each new week average sensor value in
order to keep the detector's fire alarm sensitivity constant. The fire
alarm level is in Figure 19 represented by the graph "Fire alarm level"
(C) - parallel with the graph "Week average sensor value" (B).
In Figure 19 (at Time = 0):
The week average sensor value (B) is 0.1 %/m and the fire alarm
offset is 3 %/m, i.e. the fire alarm level (C) is 0.1+3=3.1 %/m.
Service signal will be given when the week average sensor value for a
detector has reached the service signal level (1.8 %/m), i.e. the
108
The first week average sensor value will be calculated within 2½ minutes
after any restart, i.e. also after SSD download. During these 2½ minutes all
analog smoke detector fire alarms are suppressed.
109
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
detector is "dirty" and has to be replaced. See "Service level" (D) in
Figure 19. The week average sensor value will now stay on 1.8 %/m,
i.e. the detector will be more sensitive until it is replaced with a new
one.
Sensor value
Obsc. in % / m
Fire alarm level (C)
Sensor value (A)
Fire alarm 3.1
offset 3.0 %
Constant
sensitivity
Service signal
given
Week average
sensor value (B)
1.8
0.1
0
Service level (D)
Time
1
2
4
6
Smoke puff
or disturbance
8
10
12
Smoke puff
or disturbance
Figure 19. The basic working principle for an analog smoke
detector ("sensor"). Sensor value (A), Week average sensor
value (B), Fire alarm offset (3 %/m), Fire alarm level (C) and
Service level (D).
"Sensor Information" is available via menu H4/U4. Via EBLWin and
a PC connected to EBL512 G3 you can also get continuous "Sensor
Information" for one or several detectors.
Also via the Web-server II 1598 you can get "Sensor Information" for
one or several analog detectors on a COM loop.
The smoke detector sensor values are presented as obscuration in %
per meter (%/m). (Heat detector values as °C.)
17.3
Decision value
In order to secure real fire alarms and reduce the nuisance alarms, a
decision value is calculated. The decision value is used to decide if it
is normal state, pre-warning, fire alarm or heavy smoke alarm and also
in the smouldering smoke algorithm (see page 114). The decision
value is calculated, see chapter "Filtering algorithm, page 112.
17.4
Alarm algorithms for smoke detectors /
Detection levels / Offsets
Each alarm algorithm has three detection levels:
1. fire alarm (fire alarm level = the week average sensor value + the
fire alarm offset)
2. pre-warning will be activated (if selected in EBLWin – Control
unit Properties) at a lower level (smaller offset) than for fire
alarm, i.e. pre-warning will be activated before the fire alarm from
the same alarm point.
110
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
3. heavy smoke alarm will be activated at a higher level (bigger
offset) than for fire alarm, i.e. heavy smoke alarm will be
activated later than the fire alarm from the same alarm point.
The pre-warning offset and the heavy smoke alarm level can, for the
whole system, be set in EBLWin, see chapter "Alarm algorithms",
page 160.
The fire alarm offset can, for the whole system, be set in EBLWin, see
chapter "Alarm algorithms", page 160.
NOTE! This is not a normal action and a special password is required.
"Pre-warning", "Fire Alarm" and "Heavy Smoke Alarm" can activate
programmable outputs respectively, see chapter "Control expression",
page 89. See also EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777.
17.4.1
Alarm algorithm / Alternative alarm algorithm
In order to reduce the nuisance alarms109 and ensure that the real fire
alarms will be activated, six different alarm algorithms are available.
See Figure 20., page 112. They are based on:

Normal (N), High (H) or Low (L) sensitivity

Normal (15 sec.) or slow (35 sec.) detection time
Normal sensitivity (Default) Fire alarm offset is 3.0 % smoke
obscuration per meter.
High sensitivity Fire alarm offset is 2.4 % smoke obscuration per
meter, i.e. less than for normal sensitivity. Can be used when an
"early" fire alarm is wanted.
Low sensitivity Fire alarm offset is 3.6 % smoke obscuration per
meter, i.e. more than for normal sensitivity. Can be used to reduce
nuisance alarms109 but might not fulfil the EN54-7 specifications.
Normal detection time - 15 sec. (Default) There will always be min.
15 seconds alarm delay110. This is a "normal filter" to reduce nuisance
alarms.
Slow detection time - 35 sec.. There will always be min. 35 seconds
alarm delay110. This is an "extra filter" to reduce nuisance alarms109
but might not fulfil the EN54-7 specifications.
Each analog smoke detector can have two alarm algorithms
programmed (via EBLWin). One Regular alarm algorithm that is
normally used (N-15 is default) and one Alternative alarm
algorithm that is turned on/off via a time channel (internal or
external). E.g. normal sensitivity can be used during night-time and
low sensitivity during daytime (i.e. the alternative alarm algorithm is
used to reduce nuisance alarms109 during working hours).
The alarm algorithm in use can be read in menu H4/U4.
109
So called false / unnecessary alarms.
110
After the fire alarm level is reached / passed, it will take min. 15 alt. 35
seconds until fire alarm will be activated in the c.i.e.
111
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The alarm algorithm parameters can, for the whole system, be set in
EBLWin, see chapter "Alarm algorithms", page 160. (To change fire
alarm parameters a special password is required.)
17.4.2
Filtering algorithm
In order to secure a fast detection of real fire alarms and to reduce
nuisance (false) alarms to a minimum, a filtering algorithm is used.
The filtering algorithm uses the sensor values to calculate a decision
value depending on which alarm algorithm that is in use. The
decision value is zero from the beginning. Each time a new sensor
value is picked up (sampled) from an analog smoke detector 430x, this
new sensor value is compared with the actual decision value and the
decision value will be adjusted or not adjusted as follows:
If the difference, between the new sensor value and the actual decision
value is < "X", the decision value is set equal to the new sensor value.
If the difference is > "X", the decision value is increased or reduced
by "X".
"X" = The Step Value. It is different depending on the sensitivity and
detection time, i.e. it is depending on the selected alarm algorithm, see
Figure 20.
The decision value will consequently not be increased / decreased
with a value exceeding the "X" value even if the sensor values are
much higher / lower.
Analog
detector
Normal detection time (15sec.)
H-15
2.4%,
4300 / 4301
4400 / 4401
N-15
L-15
High
sensitivity
3.0%,
Normal
sensitivity
3.6%,
Low
sensitivity
X=8
X=10
X=12
Slow detection time (35sec.)
H-35
2.4%,
N-35
L-35
High
sensitivity
3.0%,
Normal
sensitivity
3.6%,
Low
sensitivity
X=4
X=5
X=6
Figure 20. The six alarm algorithms. Default is alarm algorithm
N-15, i.e. normal detection time (15 sec.) and normal sensitivity
(3%). X=The step value. (The L-15, H-35, N-35 and L-35
algorithms might not fulfil the EN54-7 specifications.)
112
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Figure 21. An example of the filtering algorithm for an Analog
smoke detector with the step value X = 5. The polling time (t) in
this example is approx. 2.56 seconds.
Explanations to the figure:
In this example, the week average sensor value is "10" (=1.0 %/m) at
the "starting point", i.e. due to contamination the pre-warning level
has been adjusted to "32" (10+22) and the fire alarm level to "40"
(10+30). The sensor value is accordingly "10".
In this example, alarm algorithm "N-15" is selected, i.e. normal
detection time 15 sec. and normal sensitivity 3% (30). X = 5. The
detector polling time t ≈ 2.56 sec. (In system EBL512 G3 the
detector polling time t ≈ 7 seconds and the step value "X" is according
to Figure 20 – but the principle is the same.)
At start the sensor values and decision values are approx. equal ("10").
When smoke comes into the detector the sensor values are increasing
and by the fourth polling approx. "27". Since 27-10 > X=5, the
decision value ("10") is increased by X=5 to "15". Next polling the
sensor value is approx. "45", i.e. the decision value ("15") is increased
by X=5 to "20", and so on. In this example the decision value never
comes up to the fire alarm level. When the sensor value is reduced to
approx. "25" the decision value is set to "30", because 35-25=10 >
X=5, i.e. the decision value ("35") is reduced by X=5 to "30", and so
on.
1. The sensor value has here reached the pre-warning level but
nothing will happen since the decision value has not reached the
pre-warning level.
2. The sensor value has here reached the fire alarm level but nothing
will happen since the decision value has not reached the fire alarm
level.
113
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
3. The decision value has here reached the pre-warning level and
pre-warning is activated.
4. The decision value is here below the pre-warning level and the
pre-warning is automatically reset.
17.4.3
Smouldering smoke algorithm
The smoke from a smouldering fire brings the sensor value to rise
very very slowly but not reach the fire alarm level. A smouldering
fire can last for hours and sometimes days. The smouldering smoke
algorithm will detect such a fire at an "early" stage.
The smouldering smoke algorithm is depending on and works in
parallel with the selected alarm algorithm, i.e. the smouldering smoke
algorithm can affect the pre-warning and fire alarm levels, see below.
If the decision value has been over the smouldering level for 7
minutes (1-2 in the figure), the pre-warning and fire alarm levels will
be lowered:
- The pre-warning level will be lowered to a level right between the
original pre-warning level and the smouldering level.
- The fire alarm level will be lowered to a level right between the
original fire alarm level and the pre-warning level.
If the decision value has reached the pre-warning level, but not the fire
alarm level, after additional 90 minutes (2-4 in the figure), the prewarning and fire alarm levels will be lowered again:
- The pre-warning level will be lowered to the original smouldering
level.
- The fire alarm level will be lowered to the original pre-warning
level.
If the decision value continue to rise fire alarm will be activated (5 in
the figure).
The smouldering smoke algorithm will be aborted and the prewarning and fire alarm levels restored to their original values if:
- The decision value becomes lower than the smouldering level.
- The decision value, after the 90 minutes, has not reached the prewarning level.
- The decision value, after the 90 minutes and additional 120
minutes, has not reached the fire alarm level.
The smouldering offset can, for the whole system, be set in EBLWin,
see chapter "Alarm algorithms", page 160.
114
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Figure 22. An example of the smouldering smoke algorithm for
an Analog smoke detector 4301.
Explanations to the figure:
In this example, the week average sensor value and the decision value
are "10" (=1 %/m) at the "starting point", i.e. due to contamination the
smouldering level has been adjusted to "24" (10+14), the pre-warning
level to "32" (10+22) and the fire alarm level to "40" (10+30).
When a smouldering fire starts, the sensor values and the decision
values will increase slowly upwards from "10".
1. The decision value has here reached the smouldering level. A 7
minutes timer is started.
2. After the 7 minutes the decision value is still over the smouldering
level and the pre-warning level and the fire alarm level are
lowered. A 90 minutes timer is started.
3. The decision value has here reached the pre-warning level and
pre-warning is activated.
4. After the 90 minutes the decision value is still over the pre-
warning level but has not reached the fire alarm level. The prewarning level and the fire alarm level are lowered again.
A 120 minutes timer is started.
5. The decision value has here reached the fire alarm level and fire
alarm is activated.
6. The decision value has here reached the original fire alarm level,
i.e. the fire alarm would have been activated approx. 90 minutes
later than with the smouldering algorithm!
17.4.4
Performance factor
To find out how the environment is where an analog smoke detector
430x and 440x in NORMAL mode is mounted, the performance
factor can be studied. The performance factor is shown in menu
H4/U4 together with the min. and max. sensor values. All three
115
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
values should be studied together. (E.g. one or two high sensor values
will not result in a high performance factor.) The performance factor
is calculated for each detector individually.
Each sensor value is compared with the week average sensor value.
The absolute difference is saved and each twenty-four hour (at
midnight) is an "average value" calculated, i.e. the performance factor.
12343
Σ |Xm-Xwa|
m=0
--------------------------- =
12343
Pf
Xm = momentary sensor values
for 24 hours.
Xwa = week average sensor value
12343 = pollings during 24 hours
17.5
If the detector is mounted in a very "stable" environment, the
performance factor will be low (min. 0 %/m).
If the detector is mounted in a very "unstable" environment, the
performance factor will be high (max. 2.55 %/m).
An "unstable" environment can cause nuisance alarms (unnecessary
alarms). Perhaps should another type of detector or alarm algorithm
be used or other functions, e.g. alert annunciation or two-address
dependence.
Algorithms for analog heat detectors
The detectors conforms to a class (see EN54-5:2000, clause 4.2)
according to the requirements of the tests specified in EN54-5:2000,
clause 5.
Each analog heat detector can have two alarm algorithms programmed
(via EBLWin). One Regular alarm algorithm that is normally used
and one Alternative alarm algorithm that is turned on/off via a time
channel (internal or external). E.g. class A1 can be used during nighttime and class B can be used during daytime (the alternative alarm
algorithm is used to reduce nuisance alarms during working hours).
The actual algorithm can be read in menu H4/U4.
When the c.i.e. has picked up a sensor value above the fire alarm
level (xx° C) for a detector, the next two values from the same
detector also have to be above the fire alarm level to activate fire
alarm in the c.i.e. (This results in an approx. 5 seconds alarm delay).
The same is valid for pre-warning except it is a lower level (xx° C)
than for fire alarm. (If pre-warning shall be generated or not, is
selected in EBLWin – System Properties).
The same is valid for heavy heat alarm except it is a higher level than
for fire alarm.
The fire alarm, pre-warning and heavy heat alarm levels can, for the
whole system, be set in EBLWin, see chapter "Alarm algorithms",
page 160.
See EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777 for more
information.
17.5.1
Class A1 algorithm
Conforms to Class A1.
Typical / max. application temperature 25 / 50° C.
Max. / min. static response temperature 54 / 65° C.
116
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The algorithm is as follows:
For a rate-of-rise < 4° C per minute:
Fire alarm level is 56° C.
Pre-warning level is 46° C.
Heavy heat alarm level is 90° C.
Rate-of-rise > 4° C per minute:
Fire alarm level is 46° C.
Pre-warning level is 36° C.
Heavy heat alarm level is 90° C.
The "Class A1 algorithm" will detect a fast temperature rise (rate-ofrise > 4° C per minute) some minutes earlier than the "Class A2
algorithm".
17.5.2
Class A2 S algorithm
Conforms to Class A2 S.
Typical / max. application temperature 25 / 50° C.
Max. / min. static response temperature 54 / 70° C.
The algorithm is as follows:
Fire alarm level is 60° C).
Pre-warning level is 50° C.
Heavy heat alarm level is 90° C.
17.5.3
Class B S algorithm
Conforms to Class B S.
Typical / max. application temperature 40 / 50° C.
Max. / min. static response temperature 69 / 85° C.
The algorithm is as follows:
Fire alarm level is 74° C.
Pre-warning level is 64° C.
Heavy heat alarm level is 90° C.
The "Class B S algorithm" can be used when the application
temperature is "high" (compare with the "Class A1 an A2 S
algorithms).
17.6
Self verification
The analog detectors 430x / 44ox in NORMAL mode have a built-in
self verification function. The detector's HW is always supervised by
the detector's S/W and CPU. Every minute, each detector will receive
a question from the c.i.e. If the self verification function has detected
any fault it will be reported back to the c.i.e. A fault will be activated
in the system and the following fault message will be shown:
FAULT: Detector xxx-xx
Technical number xxxxxx
117
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17.7
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Minimum / Maximum sensor values
To find out how the environment is, where an analog detector 33xx /
430x / 440x in NORMAL mode is mounted, the minimum and
maximum sensor values can be studied. The sensor values are
continuously picked up and evaluated by the control unit (c.i.e.) for
each detector individually. Every value is checked if it is a new
minimun or maximum value for that detector. At midnight every day
a memory will be updated and the new minimum and maximum
sensor values can be read in menu H4/U4111.
For analog smoke detectors the minimum and maximum sensor values
are shown as XX.X % (obscuration) per meter.
For analog heat detectors the values are shown as XX°C.
111
I.e. the min. / max. sensor values shown, are from the previous day.
118
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17.8
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
2-zone / 2-address dependence (Coincidence alarm)
In some premises 2-zone or 2-address dependent fire alarm ("Two unit
dependent" in EBLWin) can be used to avoid unwanted / false alarms
(nuisance alarms). A time channel can turn on/off this function.
17.8.1
2-zone dependence
Each zone in the system can be programmed to be "Two zone
dependent" for fire alarm activation. The zone has to belong to one of
ten "Two zone dependent" groups (1-10).112
Function:
Two or more zones in the same group have to be in "fire alarm
state"113 at the same time to activate fire alarm in the control unit.
When only one of the zones is in "fire alarm state" it is indicated in the
control unit (c.i.e.) as follows:


The buzzer sounds like for pre-warning (0.8 / 5 sec.).
In the c.i.e. LCD the following information is shown:
Co-incidence alarm
Zone
ZZZ
User definable alarm text.
Menu
Programmable outputs can be activated by trigger condition "Two
Zone Dependent Fire Alarm" but no other outputs will be activated.
112
See also chapter "
Two zone dependence", page 164.
113
Fire alarm state is when a fire alarm normally would have been activated
in the c.i.e.
119
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17.8.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
2-address (-unit) dependence
Each analog detector, addressable multipurpose I/O unit (3361)
monitored Input 0 (Z) and 8 zones expansion board (4580) input, can
be programmed for 2-unit dependent fire alarm activation. (Heat
detectors should not and manual call points must not be 2-unit
dependent).
Function:
Two or more units in the same zone have to be in "fire alarm state"113
at the same time to activate a fire alarm in the control unit. When only
one unit is in "fire alarm state" it is indicated in the control unit (c.i.e.)
as follows:


The buzzer sounds like for pre-warning (0.8 / 5 sec.).
In the c.i.e. LCD the following information is shown:
Co-incidence alarm
Zone
Address
ZZZ-AA
SMOKE
User definable alarm text.
Menu
Programmable outputs can be activated by trigger condition "Two
Address Dependent Fire Alarm" but no other outputs will be activated.
17.8.3
Reset of 2-zone / 2-address dependence (co-incidence
alarm
The unit / zone having activated a Co-incidence alarm will be latched
in this status for at least 5 minutes and then automatically reset.
During these 5 minutes the push button "Reset", on the c.i.e. front /
FBP, can be used to manually reset the Co-incidence alarm.
If, during these 5 minutes, at least one more unit (in the zone) or at
least one more zone (in the group) comes into "fire alarm state", the
Co-incidence alarm ends and normal fire alarms will be activated in
the c.i.e.
120
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17.9
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Delayed alarm
In some premises delayed fire alarm activation can be used to avoid
unwanted false alarms (nuisance alarms). The delay time will be
added at the end when a fire alarm normally would have been
activated in the c.i.e. This function is a violation to the EN54-2
standard.
Each analog or addressable detector, each addressable multipurpose
I/O unit (3361) monitored input (Z) and 8 zones expansion board
(4580) input in the system can be programmed (in EBLWin) to
delayed fire alarm activation. (Heat detectors should not and manual
call points must not have delayed fire alarm activation). The delay
time can be set (in EBLWin, System Properties) to 0-255 seconds.114
Function for an analog or addressable smoke detector:
An alarm point has to be in "fire alarm state"113 all the delay time, in
order to activate a fire alarm in the c.i.e. If an alarm point goes back
to "normal state" during the delay time, the delay time will be reset
and start again if/when the alarm point comes in "fire alarm state"
again.
Function for each addressable multipurpose I/O unit (3361) monitored
Input 0 (Z) and 8 zones expansion board (4580) input:
A zone in "fire alarm state" will be recorded in the c.i.e. but fire alarm
will not be activated. When the delay time has run out the zone will
be automatically reset and if it still is in "fire alarm state" a fire alarm
will now be activated in the c.i.e.
Programmable outputs can be activated during the delay of a specific
alarm point, zone or any alarm point / zone.
17.10
Selective Alarm Presentation
Instead of having all fire alarms presented in all control units (default)
it is possible to have Selective Alarm Presentation, i.e. only fire
alarms from selected control units will be presented in the control unit
respectively. This selection is done in EBLWin for the control unit
respectively.
17.11
Alarm Verification Facility
In some premises AVF can be used to avoid unwanted false alarms
(nuisance alarms). Note, this function is a violation to the EN54-2
standard.
This function is valid for any zone line input but only in the
Australian and New Zealand convention respectively. In these
conventions the function "Delayed alarm" (see above) is not valid.
The function "Delayed" is selected in the dialog box for the zone line
input respectively.
114
Default is 30 seconds and a recommended delay time is < 30 seconds.
121
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Function: A zone in "fire alarm state"115 will be recorded in EBL512
G3 but a fire alarm will not be activated. After 15 seconds the zone
will be automatically reset. If the zone comes in "fire alarm state"
again within 110 seconds a fire alarm will be activated in EBL512 G3,
else nothing will happen until the next time the zone is in "fire alarm
state" and so on.
17.12
Alert Annunciation
In some installations the Alert Annunciation function can be used to
avoid unwanted false alarms (nuisance alarms) to the fire brigade. A
time channel can turn on/off this function.116
Trained personnel are required on site to locate the fire (the room) and
take the correct measures/actions depending on if there is a fire or not.
Normally analog smoke detectors and zones with smoke detectors
only, come in question to be programmed (via EBLWin) for alert
annunciation. Heat detectors and manual call points should normally
not come in question for Alert Annunciation. A manual call point can
only activate the AA function if there are no other fire alarms
activated in the system (i.e. the second fire alarm will turn off the AA
function)117.
The AA function is normally turned on (enabled) during daytime
working hours only. A time channel can turn on/off (enable / disable)
the AA function. When the AA function is turned on (enabled) it is
indicated by the LED Routing equipment "Fire brigade tx delay" on
the c.i.e. front. Normally only one time channel is used for this
function but two or more channels can be used. The AA function can,
as an alternative, be continuously "on".
NOTE! The AA function can be de-activated (turned off) via menu
H2/B6 and will then stay so until turned on (normal) again via menu
H2/B6.
Figure 23. The Alert Annunciation function flow chart.
115
A zone with the AVF not selected would in this state activate a fire alarm
in EBL512 G3.
116
Using an internal time channel is a VdS violation.
117
This is valid even if "Multiple alarms within same zone" is selected (via
EBLWin).
122
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Alert Annunciation function:
Indications, print-outs, actions, etc. for an AA alarm are the same as
for a normal fire alarm except the output "Fire alarm" for routing
equipment (fire brigade tx) in each c.i.e. that will not be activated
directly. 118
The AA alarm has to be acknowledged within an acknowledge time
and the AA alarm has to be reset within an investigation time, else the
output(s) for routing equipment (fire brigade tx) will be activated.
During the acknowledge and investigation times:



If a fire alarm is activated by a detector / zone not programmed for
Alert Annunciation or if fire alarm is activated by a manual call
point, the output(s) for routing equipment (fire brigade tx) will be
activated.
If "Multiple alarms allowed within same zone" is set via EBLWin,
more than one AA alarm is allowed within that zone.
"Number of zones" can be set via EBLWin. Normally only one
zone with AA alarm is allowed but up to four zones can be
allowed.
Acknowledge and Reset is done on the Alert annunciation unit 1735 /
1736 or Alert annunciation controller 1740. A programmable output
("Alert Annunciation Activated") for indication and programmable
inputs ("Alert Annunciation Acknowledge" and "Alert Annunciation
Reset") can also be used. In some conventions can this also be done
in the c.i.e. (when a soft key "Ackn. alert annunciation" is available).
NOTE! The text "Ackn. alert annunciation" above the soft key will
only be visible when there is an AA alarm activated, i.e. when there is
an AA alarm that can be acknowledged.
The Acknowledge time can be set to 0-120 seconds.
The Investigation time can be set to 0-9 minutes.
NOTE! According to EN54-2, the total delay of fire alarm routing
equipment must not exceed 10 minutes (i.e. Acknowledge time +
Investigation time < 10 min.).
118
NOTE! Programmable outputs type "Fire brigade tx" will however be
activated if not the following is added to the control expression: AND NOT
Alert Annunciation Activated.
123
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17.13
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Local Alarm Acknowledgement (LAA)
This function is called Alarm Acknowledge Facility in the Australian
and New Zealand conventions.
One LAA zone can consist of one to five analog smoke detectors
(4300 / 4301 / 4400 / 4401), one LAA buzzer (e.g. Sounder base
3379) and one Local Alarm Acknowledgement Unit (LAAU). All
connected on one COM loop.
NOTE!
All devices belonging to an LAA zone must be connected to one c.i.e.
COM loop
LAA Buzzer, e.g.
Sounder Base 3379
Smoke detector (4300, 4301)
LED
LAAU
Non-latching switch
Figure 24. Local Alarm Acknowledgement units.
LAA function (see also the flow chart in the following figure):
- One of the detectors in an LAA zone reaches its fire alarm level.
The AA Process starts and the LAA buzzer sounds.
- The Acknowledgement Period starts
(A Period=10-120 sec. -- programmable via EBLWin).
- If it is a false alarm, acknowledge the alarm on the LAAU before
the A Period is ended.
- After acknowledgement an Investigation Period starts and the LAA
buzzer is silent
(I Period =1-9 min. -- programmable via EBLWin).
The AA Process ends if all the detectors in the LAA zone becomes
normal again (goes below its fire alarm level) during the I Period.
If the A or I Periods run out during the AA Process and any detector
in the LAA zone still is over its fire alarm level, normal fire alarm(s)
will be activated.
124
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Quiscent state
Any detector
in alarm?
No
Yes
Buzzer ON
Detector LED ON
LAAU LED ON
AP timer starts
LAAU
button
pressed?
Yes
Buzzer OFF
IP timer starts
No
Count down
All detectors
normal?
Yes
AP time
remains?
Yes
Detector LED OFF
LAAU LED OFF
No
Count down
No
Yes
IP time
remains?
No
Fire Alarm
in the C.I.E.
LAAU LED OFF
Figure 25. Local Alarm Acknowledgement (LAA) flow chart.
During the LAA Process, an LAA alarm will be indicated in the c.i.e.
display ….
…. during the Acknowledgement Period (A Period):
LAA zone xx, activated
…. during the Investigation Period (I Period):
LAA zone xx, investigation in progress
The LAA zone xx (xx=00-99) is only valid for the c.i.e. it is shown in,
i.e. not for the whole system.
NOTE!
The LAA alarm indication is only shown in one control unit, i.e. in the
control unit to which the LAA equipment is connected.
125
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The detectors in an LAA zone can be one to five and not be
programmed as 2-unit-dependent and not be controlled by the Alert
Annunciation function.
Only Analog photo electric smoke detector 4301 / 4401 and Analog
multi detector 4300 / 4400 can be used for LAA. If the Analog multi
detector 4300 / 4400 is used, it must be programmed as type "Two
addresses", so that only the "smoke part" of the detector can be used
for LAA.
Max. 100 LAA zones (00-99) per c.i.e.
The LAA buzzer (e.g. Sounder base 3379) has to be programmed with
the trigger condition "LAA zone alarm" (and other trigger conditions).
17.14
Quiet alarm
Quiet alarm is normally used in conjunction with the I/O Matrix board
4582119, an application board for fan control120 and an I/O unit 3361
for fan control.
Smoke detectors, programmed for quiet alarm, can be used e.g. for
controlling fans (stop / start depending on the type of fan).
Indications and actions:
 Detector LEDs are turned on (i.e. also a connected ext. LED).
 In the c.i.e. display: Quiet alarm detector ZZZ-AA
and a user definable alarm text, if programmed.
 LEDs "Fire" in the c.i.e. are blinking (0.4 / 0.4 sec.) in the
Australian and New Zealand conventions only.
 Buzzer in the c.i.e. sounding (0.8 / 5 sec.).
 Programmable outputs for quiet alarm, e.g. 3361 outputs
controlling supply air fans and standard fans i.e. any output
with a control expression containing trigger conditions "Quiet
Alarm Zone" or "Quiet Alarm Zone Address".
Quiet alarms are non-latching, i.e. they will be automatically reset
when the alarm point / zone is no longer above alarm level.
NOTE! Quiet alarm can also be programmed for a 3361 unit "zone
line input". In such a case only non-latching detectors can be used.
17.15
Fire alarm type A and Fire alarm type B
Normally the c.i.e. relay output "Fire alarm" is used for Fire alarm
routing equipment (Fire brigade tx). This output is activated for fire
alarm from any alarm point or zone line input (General fire alarm).
119
See "I/O Matrix board 4582", page 31.
120
The Fan control panel 4593 can be used for control of up to eight fans.
126
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
If the fire alarm routing equipment has provision for transmission of
several fire alarm signals and the alarm receiver has provision for
reception of several fire alarm signals, a fire alarm type B will indicate
that only one detector is activated, which could be a nuisance alarm.
If a fire alarm type A is received, the probability of a real fire is higher
than for a fire alarm type B. The alarm receiver can take different
actions depending on if it is a type A or B fire alarm.
17.15.1
Fire alarm type B
The output shall be programmed (via EBLWin) as type "Routing
equipment" and have the trigger condition "One detector alarm".
The output will be activated for fire alarm from one analog
addressable smoke, heat or multi121 detector only, or for fire alarm
from a zone line input programmed as type Smoke (B), Heat (B) or
Other (B).
17.15.2
Fire alarm type A
The output shall be programmed (via EBLWin) as type "Routing
equipment" and have the trigger condition "Multiple detector
alarm".
The output will be activated for fire alarm from:
 Two or more analog addressable smoke, heat or multi
detectors.
 Any manual call point
 Any zone line input programmed as type MCP (A) or Other
(A).
 Any programmable input with the trigger condition "General
Fire"
17.16
Disable alarm points and outputs
Temporary disablements are made via the menu H2 sub menus. For
more information see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777,
chapter "Disable or re-enable (H2)". The disablements are re-enabled
via the menu H2 sub menus.
Regular disablements are made via time channels, see chapter "Time
channels", page 158.
When alarm reset method "Single with automatic disablement" is
selected via the EBLWin "System Properties", the function will be as
follows:
121
NOTE! A multi detector can have one presentation number (ZoneAddress) or two presentation numbers depending on how it is programmed
via EBLWin. One presentation number = one detector and two presentation
numbers = two detectors regarding fire alarm types A and B.
127
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
If an alarm point or zone is in alarm state when being reset it will not
only be reset but also disabled. It has to be re-enabled (via menu
H2/B1) the same way as if it was disabled via menu H2/B1.
Disabled alarm points and outputs are indicated by LED Fault /
Disablements "General disablements" on the c.i.e. front and are listed
in menu H4/U1-U2.
Enhanced Disablement (Default) = Fire alarm, pre-warning and fault
signal cannot be activated by the disabled alarm point/zone. If only
fire alarm and pre-warning shall be disabled, "Enhanced Disablement"
shall not be selected, see chapter "System properties, Page 2", page
152.
NOTE! Enhanced Disablement is NOT valid when a time channel is
used for disablements, only when menu H2/B1 is used.
17.16.1
Disable zone
A whole zone (all addresses within a zone, except the manual call
points) can be disabled via menu H2/B1. Re-enabled via menu
H2/B1.
17.16.2
Disable zone / address
Individual alarm points (zone-address) can be disabled and re-enabled
via menu H2/B1.
Time channels can be used to disable and re-enable automatically.
17.16.3
Disable control output
All outputs (except outputs of type "Alarm Device") can be
individually disabled and re-enabled via menu H2/B2. Disabled
output will stay in (or return to) the normal condition for the output
respectively.
17.16.4
Disable / Re-enable output type
The control outputs can be collective disabled via menu H2/B3, type:
"Control (general)"
"Extinguishing"
"Ventilation"
"Interlocking"
It is possible to do this for one or more specific control units or for all
control units (i.e. the whole system). Re-enabled via menu H2/B3.
Disabled outputs will stay in (or return to) the normal condition for the
output respectively.
17.16.5
Disable / Re-enable alarm devices
The control outputs of type "Alarm device (sounder)" can be
collective disabled and re-enabled via menu H2/B4. It is only possible
to do this for all control units (i.e. the whole system). Disabled
outputs will stay in (or return to) the normal condition for the output
respectively.
128
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17.17
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Disable interlocking output
Individually disabled and re-enabled via menu H9/C3. See also
chapter "Disable / re-enable interlocking output (H9/C3)", page 107.
17.18
Disable outputs for routing equipment
Disabled and Re-enabled via menu H2/B5. For more information see
EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777.
17.19
Disconnect & Re-connect loop / zone line
input
Disconnected and re-connected via menu H8/S1:
COM loop
Zone line input
Addr. zone interface (3361 zone line input)
For more information see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions
MEW01777.
17.20
External time channels
49 external time channels (e.g. 1-49) can be used to:

disable and re-enable alarm points

turn the Alert Annunciation function on/off

activate programmable control outputs

turn Alternative alarm algorithm for analog detector types 430x
and 440x on/off

turn the 2-unit dependence function on/off
The 49 external time channels are for the whole system. One
programmable input with trigger condition/type "External Time
Channel" is used for each external time channel, which also is given a
"Name". The input is controlled by some external equipment, e.g.
another time system, a key switch, a timer, etc. with a normally open
contact (normally low) or a normally closed contact (normally high).
When the input is "activated" the time channel is ON.
NOTE! You must not use more than one input per time channel.
(This is checked in the "Validity check" in EBLWin).
17.21
Test mode
Zones can be set in Test mode. Alarm points / zones can be tested
during the Monthly test via menu H1 (in H1 up to four zones at the
same time) or separately via menu H7 (in H7 up to 100 zones at the
same time). For more information see EBL512 G3 Operating
Instructions MEW01777. The LED "Test mode" on the c.i.e. front
indicates one or more zones in Test mode. Zones in Test mode are
also simultaneously shown in the c.i.e. display. Disablements, faults
and fire alarms have higher priority, i.e. the presentation of zones in
Test mode will be suppressed during such a condition. In order to
129
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
shorten the testing time, any time delay before alarm will be "turned
off" in Test mode.122
17.22
Test alarm devices
The programmable outputs of type "Alarm device" can be collectively
activated via menu H8/S4, which make it possible to test the alarm
devices. (The test cannot be started if fire alarm already is activated in
the system.). One or all control units can be selected. When the test
starts the alarm devices will be "on" for 1 second (±1s)123, "off" for 29
seconds (±1s), "on" for 1 second and so on.124
NOTE! Also disabled (and silenced) alarm devices will be tested.
The test is stopped via menu H8/S4, if a fire alarm is activated in the
system or after one hour.
17.23
Test of outputs
The programmable outputs (incl. addressable alarm devices) can be
tested, i.e. activated, via EBLWin but also via menu H8/S8. At the
start of the test the output respectively will be activated no matter if its
control expression is false. At the end of the test the output
respectively will be de-activated but only if its control expression at
that time is false.
17.24
Test of routing equipment
Via menu H1 it is possible to test the "Fault condition" and "Fire
alarm" outputs for routing equipment (Fault tx, Fire brigade tx and
corresponding programmable outputs). Open door etc. will not affect
the test.
In menu H1, select "Yes" and press " " to start the test. A 60 seconds
count-down starts. The "Fault condition" output will be activated125,
indicated by LED "Fault tx activated" on the c.i.e. front. After 30
seconds will also the "Fire alarm" output(s) be activated, indicated by
LED "Fire brigade tx" on the c.i.e. front. After 30 seconds more (60
sec. in all) the test will be ended and the outputs and LEDs will go
back to "normal" status.
122
Any 2-zone / -address dependence and the function "delayed alarm" will
be ignored.
123
Some COM loop unit outputs might be "on" a little longer.
124
The output activation will be continuously (steady). For the alarm
devices 3377 and 3379, the tone with the highest priority level (and type
"alarm device") will be automatically selected.
125
NOTE! Fault condition outputs are normally activated in "normal" state,
i.e. they will in this case be de-activated.
130
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
17.25
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Calibration of supervised outputs
The supervised (monitored) outputs have to be calibrated after the
installation.126 This is done via a menu (H5/A1) in the c.i.e.
Calibration range is 4K7 – 50K or 470 nF – 5 x 470 nF. If the
calibrated value is outside the range respectively or if the actual value
differs from the calibrated value ± a small tolerance, a fault will be
generated.
17.26
Service signal
All smoke detectors get contaminated no matter what environment
they are mounted in. In some environments it goes faster than in
others – depending on type of activity etc.
Conventional smoke detector: The sensitivity will normally increase
in most environments. This can result in unwanted false alarms
(nuisance alarms) since all conventional smoke detectors (except
4350, see page 144) have a fixed fire alarm level. Conventional
smoke detectors have no service signal output and have to be replaced
on a regular basis (i.e. before being too contaminated).
Analog smoke detector: The sensitivity will automatically be
constant.127 Service signal will be activated at a fixed service level.
For detectors 4300, 4301, 4400 and 4401, all in NORMAL mode,
Service signal will be activated when the week average sensor value is
> 1.8 %/m. For detectors 4400 and 4401 in Advanced mode the
Service signal will be activated when the sensitivity compensation
value is 2 %/m.
Analog multi detector with CO: For detector 4402 (in NORMAL
mode) the Service signal will be activated when the sensitivity
compensation value is 2 %/m or 60 months after CO sensor´s
production date.
For more information, see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions
MEW01777 chapter "Sensors activating Service signal (H4/U5)" and
"Acknowledge Service signal (H8/S3)".
17.27
Fault signal (fault condition)
Fault signal, fault messages, fault acknowledge, etc. are described in
EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777, chapter "Fault".
126
C.i.e. outputs S0-S3: E-o-l resistor 33K. 1 – 5 resistors (33K) can be
used. 3364 outputs VO0-VO1: E-o-l capacitor 470 nF. 1 – 5 capacitors
(470 nF) can be used.
127
The detector is supervised at all times and adapts its fire alarm level in
relation to the contamination of the detector, see chapter "Week average
sensor value", page 106.
131
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Programmable inputs can be used for external equipment to generate
fault signal in the EBL512 G3 c.i.e. See chapter "Programmable
inputs", page 72.
For faults from zones and alarm points also the Alarm text (see below)
will be shown.
The fault list can be printed via menu H6.
17.28
Alarm texts
The alarm texts are shown in case of fire alarm.
When a fire alarm is activated, the presentation number (Zone –
Address) will be shown in a field in the middle of the c.i.e. display.
On the row just below the presentation number, the user definable
alarm text for that alarm point will be shown, if programmed.128 The
alarm text will also be presented in Ext. Fire Brigade Panels, etc. The
alarm text, together with the presentation number, will be printed
when a printer is available in the c.i.e or the Ext. FBP.
See also EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777, chapter
"Fire alarm".
The alarm texts, up to 40 alphanumeric characters, are created and
downloaded via EBLWin. Each addressable alarm point can have the
same alarm text displayed in the Ext. FBPs 1826 & 1828, the Alert
Annunciation units 1735 & 1736 and in the Ext. Presentation unit
1728 or a different alarm text in each unit.
The alarm text will also be shown together with the fault message for
an alarm point.
17.28.1
Creating the alarm texts via EBLWin
In the dialog box for any alarm point (e.g. a detector/sensor)129, there
is a "Text" field where the alarm text for that alarm point can be typed
(or edited). The alarm text will be shown in the c.i.e. display when
this alarm point has activated fire alarm and also together with the
fault message when this alarm point has generated a fault.
128
See also chapter "Limitations", page 193.
129
In EBLWin.
132
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Alarm text
Text editor
The alarm text can, as an alternative, be typed (or edited) in the
EBLWin "Text editor" (menu System | Edit Alarm Texts…).
No matter where the text is typed, it will be shown on both places.
Explanations:
Zone-Address column
Shows the already programmed alarm points (e.g. 001-01, 001-02,
002-01 etc.).
Only the texts have to be typed / edited in the "Text" column.
Shows the already programmed zones, i.e. I/O unit 3361 zone line
inputs programmed with address "00" (i.e. ZZZ – 00) and 8 zones
expansion board 4580 zone line inputs.
Only the texts have to be typed / edited in the "Text" column.
Text column
Shows already programmed alarm texts. Texts can be typed / edited.
NOTE! If any alarm point shall have a different alarm text in one or
more of the "display units" 1826, 1828, 1735, 1736 or 1728130, the
text has to be typed in the EBLWin "Text editor", for the "display
unit" respectively (Properties | Edit texts…):
130
Regarding text priority order etc. see Technical Description (chapt. "User
definable text messages") for the "display unit" respectively.
133
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Explanations (Text editor for one specific "display unit"):
Zone-Address column
Shows the already programmed alarm points (e.g. 001-01, 001-02,
002-01 etc.).
Shows the already programmed zones, i.e. I/O unit 3361 zone line
inputs and 8 zones expansion board 4580 zone line inputs,
programmed with address "00" (i.e. ZZZ – 00).
Text in control unit column (cannot be edited here)
Shows the already programmed alarm texts for each alarm point /
zone. This is only information and cannot be edited here. These texts
will be displayed in the c.i.e. and all "display units" 1826, 1828, 1735,
1736 and 1728 if there are no other texts programmed in the "Text
column".
Text column
The text to be shown in this specific "display unit" for the alarm point
/ zone respectively, has to be typed (edited) here. NOTE! In this
"display unit" this text will now be shown instead of the text in the
"Text in control unit" column, for the alarm point / zone respectively.
17.28.2
Downloading alarm texts to the DU:s 1728 / 1735 /
1736 and ext. FBP:s 1826 / 1828
The texts will be downloaded when the site specific data (SSD) is
downloaded via EBLWin.
The unit respectively has to be set in S/W mode xxxx – 1587
17.29
Real time clock (RTC)
Each control unit has an RTC. It is used for (date) and time
presentation for fire alarms, faults, event logging and the time
channels 2-14. In a system with two or more control units in a TLON
network is the time in all control units synchronised.131
17.29.1
Daylight saving time
The time is automatically changed when the Daylight saving time
period starts and stops respectively, if set so in EBLWin. When, is
depending on which convention that is used:
 Australian convention: Forward 1 hour the first Sunday in
October, 02:00  03:00. Backward 1 hour the first Sunday in
April, 03:00  02:00.
 New Zealand convention: Forward 1 hour the last Sunday in
September, 02:00  03:00. Backward 1 hour the first Sunday
in April, 03:00  02:00.
131
The calendar and clock can be set in any c.i.e. for the whole system.
Every day (at midnight) all calendars and clocks will be synchronised.
134
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
 All other conventions: Forward 1 hour the last Sunday in
March, 02:00  03:00. Backward 1 hour the last Sunday in
October, 03:00  02:00.
17.30
Loss of main power source
Regarding the Main power source and Second power source, see
chapter "Power supply", page 188.
17.30.1
Fault: Loss of main power source
The delay time for the fault "Loss of main power source" can be set
(in EBLWin) to 1 – 300 minutes. (A delay time > 30 minutes is a
violation to the EN54-2 standard.
17.30.2
LCD backlight
In order to reduce the current consumption the LCD backlight will
never be turned on during loss of the main power source.
17.31
Evacuate
When the soft key "Evacuate" (P7)132 is pressed133, all outputs
programmed for sounders (i.e. type "Alarm devices"), will be
collective turned ON (steady). This is indicated in the LCD:
Evacuate in progress
The sounders will remain turned ON until they are turned OFF by
pressing the soft key "Evacuate off" (P7).134
NOTE 1! The alarm devices (sounders) will always be activated
steady (sound continuously) irrespective of the fact that the outputs
can be set to anything else for fire alarm (e.g. intermittent).
NOTE 2! The text “Menu” above the soft key (P4) is visible in the
display only if the door in the c.i.e. is open, while the text "Evacuate" /
"Evacuate off" above (P7) is always visible in the current conventions.
17.32
Zone groups
Zones can be grouped together in a zone group. The zone group is
given a name, e.g. ‘Floor 2’, and can then be used in control
expressions for activation of outputs, e.g. FireAlarmZoneGroup
(‘Floor 2’).
132
The soft key "Evacuate" is only visible / valid for the Belgian, British
Standard, Hungarian, Spanish and Ukrainian conventions.
133
Alt. when a programmable input is activated. One input per c.i.e.
134
Alt. when the programmable input is de-activated.
135
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Max 30 zone groups can be defined. Each zone group can contain an
unlimited number of zones, but a zone can only be member of one
zone group.
See also chapter “Zone groups”, page 165.
136
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
18
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Special New Zealand functions
Some functions are adapted to New Zealand regulations and are
described separately.
135
Indicated by LED "General disablements" on the c.i.e. front.
136
Always latched, regardless of if faults are programmed to be not latched.
137
Since this fault is always latched, it has to be acknowledged via menu H6.
137
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
19
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Advanced mode
The latest generation of detectors are the following:
 Conventional photoelectric smoke detector 4452
 Analog photoelectric smoke detector 4401
 Analog multi detector 4400
NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE!
The analog detectors 4401 and 4400 can via the address setting tool
4414 be set in different modes. In this chapter is only the Advanced
mode described. The detectors are factory set to the NORMAL
mode, see chapters "COM loop units", page 38 and "Functions /
Services / Features", page 109. The analog detectors 4401 and 4400
in NORMAL mode will function as and replace the analog detectors
4301 and 4300 in NORMAL mode respectively. (The analog
detectors 4301 and 4300 cannot use the Advanced mode.)
The Advanced mode can be set with the address setting tool 4414
only. Not with the address setting tool 3314.
The conventional detector 4452 uses some of the advanced mode
functions, see the function respectively below in this chapter.
Artificial Intelligence (AI function) uses combined smoke and heat
sensing for the fire judgement, as well as variable sensitivity and time
delay based on the smoke and temperature changes just before the
alarm level is reached. This will secure the real fire alarms and reduce
the not wanted false (nuisance) alarms with up to 46 %.
The AI function is depending on if the detector is a photoelectric
smoke detector (4452 / 4401) or a multi detector (4400):
Combined heat and smoke sensing will guarantee reliable and
accurate fire alarm detection, e.g. by shortening the delay time
and/or raise the sensitivity (i.e. lower the alarm threshold level).
Variable delay time. The delay time is influenced by the
temporary temperature and/or smoke obscuration changes just
before and after the alarm threshold level was passed. The
delay time before a fire alarm is activated can be shortened up
to 50 % (e.g. from 20 to 10 sec.), or the delay time can be
138
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
extended in order to reduce false (nuisance) alarms.
A learning function will after a learning period adapt an
Alarm algorithm suitable for the smoke and temperature
conditions in the area where the detector is located.
Alarm algorithms for the following areas can be adapted:
Normal area
Clean area
Smoke-steam area
Cooking-welding area
(default)
(higher sensitivity)
(longer delay time)
(longer delay time &
lower sensitivity)
There is also a Heater area Alarm algorithm. This is similar to the alarm algorithm for the
Normal area but the rate-of-rise function (deltaT) will not be used for alarm activation.
19.1
Pulse up – down counter
The detector have a "pulse up – down counter", starting at "0" and
cannot be negative.
respectively
19.1.1
Pulse up – down counter for smoke
When the smoke obscuration S (%/m) > the alarm threshold level, "1"
is added to the counter every second.
When S < the alarm threshold level, "2" is subtracted from the counter
every second.
139
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
19.1.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Pulse up – down counter for temperature
When the temperature T (°C) > the alarm threshold level, "3" is added
to the counter every second)
When the temperature rise deltaT (°C/168sec.) > the alarm threshold
level, "3" is added to the counter every second.
When T or deltaT < the alarm threshold level, "2" is subtracted from
the counter every second.
19.1.3
Pulse up – down counter for smoke & temperature
When 2S+deltaT > the alarm threshold level, "1" is added to the
counter every second.
When 2S+deltaT < the alarm threshold level, "2" is subtracted from
the counter every second.
19.2
Fire judgement
The fire judgement is depending on the alarm threshold level, which
is depending on the area alarm algorithm ("learning mode" in the
following tables) and a delay time, which is dependent on if the cause
of alarm is smoke S, temperature T or deltaT or a combination of
smoke and temperature 2S+deltaT and also the area alarm
algorithm.
When the counter shows "9" (i.e. at the earliest after nine seconds in
case of S or 2S+deltaT and after three seconds in case of T or
deltaT), the delay time starts and has to run out before a fire alarm
will be activated in the c.i.e.
19.3
Alarm threshold levels
Depending on the detector type and Area alarm algorithm there are
alarm threshold levels (S, T, deltaT and 2S+deltaT) not only for fire
alarm but also for pre-warning and heavy smoke / heat alarm.
The following fire alarm threshold levels are valid for the different
type of detectors:
4452:
Area
alarm
Learning
algorithm
mode
4401:
Area alarm
algorithm
140
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
4400:
Area alarm
algorithm
4402:
19.4
Alarm delay time
The alarm delay time will be different for the different type of
detectors depending on the cause of alarm, Area alarm algorithm and
the values before / after the fire alarm threshold level was exceeded.
4452: Normally 9 seconds.
4401:
Area alarm
algorithm
4400:
Area alarm
algorithm
141
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
data1 = The average smoke obscuration value (S) for 60 seconds before the alarm
threshold level was passed.
data2 = The sum of the difference between the smoke obscuration value (S) and the
alarm threshold level every second for nine seconds after the counter shows "9".
data2' = The sum of the difference between the 2S+deltaT value and alarm threshold
level every second for nine seconds after the counter shows "9".
NOTE!
Max. alarm delay time is 60 seconds.
If the cause of alarm is T or deltaT the alarm delay time will be 9 seconds.
The alarm delay time function will be cancelled after 18 seconds if one of the
following conditions is true:
S (%/m) > fire threshold level (S) x 2
T (°C) > fire threshold level (T)
deltaT (°C/168 sec.) > fire threshold level (deltaT)
4402:
NOTE!
Max. alarm delay time is 60 seconds.
19.5
Learning function / Learning period
Detectors 4400 and 4401 can use a Learning function, i.e. Depending
on the local temperature changes and the local occurrence of smoke
where the detector is situated, each detector can after a learning
period adapt a more appropriate alarm algorithm than the default
(Normal) one, an Area Alarm algorithm.138 See also page 139.
19.5.1
Area Alarm algorithms
Normal area is the default Area alarm algorithm for each detector.
There are four other Area alarm algorithms that can be adapted after
the learning period:
 Smoke – Steam area, is depending on occurrence of smoke, i.e.
level 1 = S [%/m] > half the fire alarm threshold level (S).
 Heater area, is depending on rise of temperature, i.e. level 2 =
deltaT [°C/168 sec.] > 12 (approx. 4.3°C/min.).
138
Via EBLWin is set if an Area Alarm algorithm shall be automatically
adapted via the Learning function or manually set via EBLWin. If manually
set, also an alternative Area Alarm algorithm can be set that can be controlled
via a time channel.
142
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
 Cooking – Welding area, is depending on occurrence of smoke
together with rise of temperature, i.e. level 3 = 2S+deltaT >
10. NOTE! S has to be > 2.5 and deltaT has to be > 3.
 Clean area, is the most sensitive condition, requiring a very
clean and stable environment, i.e. the values for all the other
types of areas (level 1, 2 and 3) must not be exceeded.
Smoke – Steam area, level 1
19.5.1.1
36h
1
36h
2
36h
36h


3
4
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

5
6
7
8
9
10
A learning period contains twenty 36h-periods (i.e. 20 x 36h = 720h
= 30 days = one month).
During each 36h-period it is recorded if level 1 is exceeded at least
one time. If so, the 36h-period will get a check-mark, see example.
When three (or more) of the 36h-periods during the learning period
have a check-mark, the Smoke - Steam area Alarm algorithm will be
adapted (i.e. as earliest after 3 x 36h = 108h = 4½ days). In the
example this will happen in the 36h-period no. 10 (i.e. after 10 x 36h
= 360h = 15 days).
After the 36h period no. 20, a new learning period starts. The
check-marks are inherited from the previous learning period.
Depending on if level 1 is exceeded or not during each 36h period,
the check-marks will remain or be removed.
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h

1
2
3
4
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
36h
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

5
6
7
8
9
10
In the example, the Smoke - Steam area Alarm algorithm will be
changed back to the Normal area Alarm algorithm after the 36h
period no. 3, since at that time there are left only two 36h periods
with check-marks in this learning period. (If later, one or more 36h
periods will get a check-mark, the Smoke - Steam area Alarm
algorithm will be adapted again as long as three or more of the 36hperiods during this learning period have a check-mark.)
19.5.1.2
Heater area, level 2
The learning function is the same as for the Smoke - Steam area
Alarm algorithm but level 2 is used instead of level 1.
19.5.1.3
Cooking – Welding area, level 3
The learning function is the same as for the Smoke - Steam area
Alarm algorithm but level 3 is used instead of level 1.
143
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
19.5.1.4
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Clean area, level 1, 2 & 3
For this area Alarm algorithm to be adapted there must be no checkmark for level 1, level 2 and level 3 respectively during the learning
period, i.e. no check-mark what so ever. The Clean area Alarm
algorithm cannot be adapted until earliest one month after c.i.e. power
on.
The Clean area Alarm algorithm will be changed back to the
Normal area Alarm algorithm directly if any 36h period for level 1,
level 2 and level 3 respectively gets a check-mark, i.e. any check-mark
what so ever.
19.5.1.5
Learning function summary
A detector can adapt the following area Alarm algorithms depending
on if and when level 1, level 2 and level 3 is exceeded or not.
The following is valid for the different type of detectors:
4452: This detector does not use the Learning function.
4400: This detector uses the Learning function (in Advanced mode),
i.e. the area Alarm algorithms Normal, Smoke – Steam, Clean,
Heater and Cooking - Welding can be adapted.
4401: This detector uses the Learning function (in Advanced mode),
i.e. the area Alarm algorithms Normal, Smoke – Steam and Clean
can be adapted.
4402: This detector does not use the Learning function.
19.6
Analog data output
The smoke obscuration value (%/m) and the temperature (°C) can be
shown via the c.i.e. A new value is calculated every second. (The
smoke obscuration value is an average value for the last four seconds.)
The following is valid for the different type of detectors:
4452: This detector has no analog output.
4400: This detector has a smoke obscuration value output and a
temperature value output to the c.i.e.
4401: This detector has a smoke obscuration value output to the c.i.e.
4402: This detector has a smoke obscuration value output, a
temperature value output and a CO value output to the c.i.e.
19.7
Sensitivity compensation
In order to maintain a constant sensitivity regardless of the contamination of the detector, a Contamination Compensation Factor (CCF) is
subtracted from the momentary smoke obscuration values before
evaluated in the alarm algorithms etc.
The Contamination
Compensation Factor (CCF) is calculated during a 36 hours period as
follows:
During 13 minutes, all the momentary smoke obscuration values are
saved and an average value is calculated. The CCF will be changed
directly if the average value is lower than the actual CCF, else no
change.
144
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
This is valid for 18 hours. Then the CCF will be changed also if the
average value is higher than the actual CCF. (It will normally be
higher because of contamination.)
After another 18 hours (i.e. in total 36 hours) the CCF will be changed
if the average value is lower or higher than the actual CCF and it will
be saved in the detector's EEPROM, i.e. it can be used e.g. after the
detector has been without power supply.
A new 18 + 18 = 36 hours period starts with an average value
calculation every 13th minute.
Max. Contamination Compensation Factor (CCF) is 2 %/m.
Service signal will then be activated and shown in the c.i.e.
The following is valid for the different type of detectors:
4452: This detector has sensitivity compensation. No Service signal.
4400: This detector has sensitivity compensation. Service signal.
4401: This detector has sensitivity compensation. Service signal.
4402: This detector has sensitivity compensation as well as a CO
sensor 60 months signal. Service signal.
19.8
Self diagnosis of internal devices
The detectors perform an internal check of some vital functions and
components (e.g. the IR-LED). In some modes a separate fault
message will be shown in the c.i.e.
The following is valid for the different type of detectors:
4452: This detector has no self diagnosis of internal devices.
4400: This detector has self diagnosis of internal devices. A fault
message will be shown in the c.i.e.
4401: This detector has self diagnosis of internal devices. A fault
message will be shown in the c.i.e.
4402: This detector has self diagnosis of internal devices. A fault
message will be shown in the c.i.e.
19.9
Address setting check
The red indication LEDs in the detectors 4401, 4400 and 4402 will in
all modes be blinking every second when the detector is powered and
the COM loop address is not set with the Address setting tool 3314 /
4414, i.e. as long as the address is "000". The address should be set in
the interval 001-255.
NOTE! 4414 is required when Advanced mode shall be used for
4401 and 4400.
19.10
Polling LED
The green polling LED in the detectors 4401, 4400 and 4402 can in
Advanced mode be set (via EBLWin) to be blinking (20 ms / 7 s),
indicating that it receives the commands from the c.i.e. correctly.
NOTE! When the detector is in test mode the green polling LED will
be turned off, indicating it is in test mode.
145
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
20
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Control unit properties
Figure 26. The EBLWin "Control unit properties" dialog box.
NOTE! Default settings in EBLWin might vary depending on
convention.
20.1
Control unit properties dialog box
Opens when you add a control unit or via the "Control unit" pop-up
menu (Properties...)
20.1.1
General Information
Control unit number: A stand-alone control unit has to have no. 0.
In a system (TLON Network) the control units are numbered from 0 to
29.
Name: Normally not changed but can be changed when required.
20.1.2
20.1.3
Peripherals

MMI board (default): This check box shall be marked when
the c.i.e. has a front with display (i.e. EBL512 G3 type 5000).
This check box shall not be marked when the c.i.e. has no front
(i.e. EBL512 G3 type 5001).

Printer (only valid for EBL512 G3 type 5000) This check box
shall be marked when the c.i.e. is equipped with a printer.
Misc.
Configured number of alarm points: 128, 256 or 512. Factory
setting made by delivery. See also chapter "Upgrade number of alarm
points", page 148.
NOTE! 1020 COM loop unit addresses are always available but max.
512 of these 1020 addresses can be alarm points.
146
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
In the Australian convention only, the number of alarm points per
c.i.e. can be set to 128, 256, 512 or 1020.
Set the number and the validation check in EBLWin can give a "too
many alarm points" warning if required. The validation check is
automatically performed when starting a download of SSD to the c.i.e.
20.2

Suppress buzzer during fault from other control units: This
check box shall be marked if faults generated in other control
units shall be suppressed in this control unit, i.e. if the buzzer shall
sound for faults generated in this control unit only.

Use Pre-warning: This check box shall be marked if the prewarning detection shall be enabled, i.e. pre-warnings will be
activated in this control unit and presented in all control units. All
programmable outputs in the system, with trigger condition "Prewarning", will be activated (if not disabled).
Checkbox not marked = Pre-warnings will not be activated in this
control unit.
EBLWin Control unit pop-up menu
Some commands are disabled since you have to connect and log on to
the control unit to be able to select / use them.
20.2.1
Reset alarm counter
The control unit has an alarm counter that can be reset if required.
(Level 2, i.e. a special access code is required.)
147
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
20.2.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Software version
The control unit software (S/W) version will be displayed.
20.2.3
Upgrade number of alarm points
The control unit is by delivery configured for 128, 256 or 512 alarm
points. Number of alarm points can on site, via EBLWin, be
upgraded (i.e. 128  256  512).
If you wish to upgrade the number of alarm points, a PC and EBLWin
are used. The PC has to be connected to the USB connector in the
control unit and you have to log on.
Select the control unit icon, right click. Select "Upgrade number of
alarm points" and an "Upgrade" dialog box opens.
Click "Read" for the valid number of alarm points and the Serial
number for the control unit you are connected to.
If the number of alarm points shall be changed, report the Serial
number to the producer, in order to receive a password.139
Write the new number of alarm points and the received password in
the field respectively.
Click "Write" to configure the control unit for the new number of
alarm points.
The "Configured number of alarm points" in the "Control unit
properties" dialog box also has to be changed.
20.2.4
Show event log
Three different event log lists, Alarm (999 events), Interlocking (999
events) and General log (999 events) can be shown. They are valid
for the whole system.
139
The password will be generated with a special PC program (with a
hardware lock) and is unique for every Serial number and number of alarm
points combination.
148
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
20.2.5
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Restart
You can restart control unit via this menu command.
20.2.6
Delete
The selected control unit can be deleted.
20.2.7
Properties
See beginning of this chapter – Control unit properties dialog box.
20.2.8
Add Web-server
The Web-server configuration program opens. One Web-server per
Control unit can be added and max. five (0-4) in the whole system.
149
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
21
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
System properties (settings)
Figure 27. The EBLWin "System properties" dialog box, Page 1 and Page 2.
NOTE! Default settings in EBLWin might vary depending on
convention.
21.1
System properties dialog box
Opens via the "System" pop-up menu or via menu "System"
(Properties...).
21.1.1
Name
Normally the installation name. (Max. 22 characters.)
21.1.2
User definable text
For user definable text. Two rows, in total 40 characters. (Carriage
return takes 2 characters.) The text will be shown in all control units.
See also EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions MEW01777.
21.1.3
System properties, Page 1
21.1.3.1
Alert Annunciation
See also chapter "Alert Annunciation", page 122.
Acknowledgement time: 30 sec.
30 is default. 0-120 (= 2 min.) is possible.
Investigation time: 3 min.
3 is default. 0-9 is possible.
NOTE! According to EN54-2, the total delay of fire alarm routing
equipment (Acknowledge time + Investigation time) must not exceed
10 minutes.
Number of zones: 1
1 is default. 1-4 is possible.

Multiple alarms allowed within same zone
Normally only one Alert Annunciation alarm is allowed within the
zone. If more Alert Annunciation alarms within the zone are
allowed, this checkbox shall be marked.
150
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
21.1.3.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Local Alarm Acknowledgement
See also chapter "Local Alarm Acknowledgement (LAA)", page 124.
Investigation period (IP) time: 3 min.
3 is default. 1-9 is possible.
Acknowledge period (AP) time: 60 sec.
60 is default. 10-120 is possible.
21.1.3.3
Disable routing equipment by door switch
Valid for the following control unit outputs for routing equipment:
Fire alarm (for Fire brigade tx)
Fault condition (for Fault tx)

None (default): Door open in a C.U. or an ext. FBP will not
disable these outputs.

Any control unit door: Door open in any C.U. will disable these
outputs in all C.U:s.

Any door: Door open in any C.U. or any ext. FBP will disable
these outputs in all C.U:s.
In the display (or via menu H4/U1) is shown (xx = C.U. number):
Fire alarm routing disabled
(by open door in
CU xx)
21.1.3.4
Alarm reset method
One of the following alternatives shall be selected.

All (default): All fire alarms in the system will be reset
simultaneously by pressing the "Reset" button (on the c.i.e. front)
once.

Single: One fire alarm in the system, i.e. the fire alarm shown in
the field in the middle of the control unit display will be reset by
pressing the "Reset" button once. Any other fire alarm has to be
reset the same way, one by one.
This function is a violation to the EN54-2 standard.

Single With Automatic Disablement: Like "Single" reset but
with the Disablement function (see below) as well.
This function is a violation to the EN54-2 standard.
Disablement function: If an alarm point or zone is reset while it still is
in alarm state (e.g. smoke in a smoke detector or a manual call point
with a broken glass) this unit will be automatically disabled in order to
not activate a new fire alarm within 20 seconds. It will stay disabled
until re-enabled via menu H2/B1.
LED Fault / Disablements "General disablements" on the c.i.e. front
is indicating one or more disablement in the system.
151
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
21.1.3.5
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Alarm delay time (seconds)
Valid for the detectors and zone line inputs with this option selected
via EBLWin140.
30 is default. 0-255 seconds is possible. Note, this delay time starts
when the fire alarm normally should have been activated.
21.1.4
System properties, Page 2

Fault latching (default): All faults have to be acknowledged, also
corrected faults.
Checkbox not marked = No fault latching = Not corrected faults
have to be acknowledged but corrected faults will automatically
be deleted from the fault list.

Global reset of Fan Controls Outputs: Reset of fan control
system is global, i.e. all fan control systems in the EBL512 G3
system will be reset. (Regarding Fan control, see page 31.)
Checkbox not marked = Reset of fan control systems is local, i.e.
all fan control systems in the c.i.e. where the switch is located will
be reset.

Use Daylight Saving:
Australian convention: Forward 1 hour the first Sunday in
October, 02:00  03:00. Backward 1 hour the first Sunday in
April, 03:00  02:00.
New Zealand convention: Forward 1 hour the last Sunday in
September, 02:00  03:00. Backward 1 hour the first Sunday in
April, 03:00  02:00.
All other conventions: According to the current EU regulations,
i.e. forward 1 hour the last Sunday in March, 02:00  03:00.
Backward 1 hour the last Sunday in October, 03:00  02:00.
Checkbox not marked = Daylight saving time is not used.

Button "Silence alarm devices" disables alarm devices:
Function, see page 137. Can be used in all conventions.

Silence Buzzer With Door Switch: If the buzzer in the c.i.e.
shall be silenced when the door is opened, this checkbox shall be
marked. This is a violation to the EN54-2 standard.

Redundant TLON Network: This checkbox shall be marked
when two TLON Networks shall be used, i.e. each control unit in
the system has to be equipped with two TLON connection boards
(5090). See also chapter "TLON connection board ", page 37.
Flash LED on MCP: The manual call point (type 3333 / 3339 /
4433 / 4439) built-in LED will flash to indicate communication
with the c.i.e.
Checkbox not marked = This option is disabled, i.e. the LED is
switched off until the call point is operated.

140
Regarding the Australian and New Zealand conventions the "Alarm
Verification Facility" is valid, see page 118.
152
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
21.1.4.1

Green polling LED:
Valid for the detectors 440x in Advanced mode and detector
4402 in Normal mode.
The detectors 4400, 4401 and 4402 have a green polling LED.
Always off = The green polling LED is not used.
Flash when polled = The green polling LED will be blinking 20
ms / 7 sec. indicating the communication with the c.i.e.
NOTE! When the detector is in test mode the green polling LED
will be turned off until the test mode is turned off.

Enhanced disablements: Disabled alarm point141 will not
activate pre-warning, fire alarm or fault.
Checkbox not marked = Disabled alarm point141 will not activate
pre-warning or fire alarm. Fault can still be activated.
This is a violation to the EN54-2 standard.
Door closing by time

21.1.4.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Active: If all fire doors (trigger condition "Fire Door Closing")
shall be closed at a definite time every day, this checkbox shall be
marked and the time (hh:mm) set, e.g. 23:00.
Main power loss fault delay time (minutes)
A fault will be activated mm minutes after loss of mains (230 V AC).
30 is default. 0-300 minutes is possible.
141
The sensor values for a disabled analog smoke detector will not be saved.
153
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
22
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
EBLWin menus
When EBLWin is opened, the most recently used / saved (MRU)
installation will be opened aut. if the checkbox "Open MRU at
startup" is selected in the "EBLWin Settings" (Options) dialog box,
else a new EBL512G3 system will be opened.
NOTE! If the MRU installation is an EBL128 system, a new EBL512
G3 system has to be selected via menu "File | New", see below.
22.1
The File menu
22.1.1
New
To open a new installation. The type of system has to be selected.
System EBL512 G3 (default)
System EBL128
22.1.2
Open
To open an installation via a standard Windows dialog box "Open".
EBLWin file (*.ebl)
WinG3 file (*.WinG3)
Win128 file (*.Win128)
22.1.3
Import from Win512
To open an installation via a standard Windows dialog box "Open".
Win512 file (*.512). NOTE! Only valid for version 2.7.x.
22.1.4
Report
Installation Document All System properties, Control unit
properties, etc. will be saved in a file (EBLWin Installation
Document.htm), via a standard Windows dialog box "Save As".
Alarm points A list of all alarm points will be saved in a file
(Alarm points report.htm), via a standard Windows dialog box
"Save As".
Outputs affected by alarm points A list of all programmable
outputs and which alarm points that will activate them will be
154
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
saved in a file (Alarm points outputs report.htm), via a standard
Windows dialog box "Save As".
22.1.5
Save
To save an installation (xxxxxx.ebl). The very first time, via a
standard Windows dialog box "Save As".
22.1.6
Save As
To save an installation (xxxxxx.ebl), via a standard Windows dialog
box "Save As".
22.1.7
Print labels
Labels with Zone-Address for the specified range of programmed
alarm points will be printed. In order to set the margins etc. the
following dialog box will open:
For the Label holder (3390) can a MARKO sheet be used, i.e.
Labels for 3390 (3391) 10 sheets à 132 labels.
22.2
The View menu
First time EBLWin is opened after installation the tree view will be
visible to the left in the window. (To the right will the tabs
"Deviations" and "Selected loop" be available.)
22.2.1
Tree view
Visible / open by default.
If the tree view for some reason has been closed it can be opened
again via menu "View" and "Tree view".
155
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The tree view shows the system and will be updated for every unit
added to the system.
The colour of the control unit symbol is black in a new system or if its
properties have been revised or units have been added or deleted after
the latest download of SSD.
22.2.2
Deviations
To the right of the tree view, the tab "Deviations" is available by
default.
There is a button to open a list of:
- fire alarms (selected or all can be reset)
- faults (selected or all can be acknowledged)
- disablements (selected or all can be re-enabled)
- activated interlocking combinations
- service signals (selected or all can be acknowledged)
- open doors
- technical warnings
You can print and save what you see in the list respectively. A filter
function is available.
22.2.3
Selected loop
To the right of the tree view, the tab "Selected loop" is available by
default.
COM loop units can be added two ways. Via the tree view (COM
loop pop-up menu) or via the "Selected loop" tab. Click a COM loop
unit symbol to add the unit to the list. Then edit its properties. The
"Selected loop" list and the tree view will show the same information.
22.2.4
Alarm points
To the right of the of the tree view can the "Alarm points" tab be
available.
This is a list, for the whole system, showing all alarm points and their
properties.
The list can be sorted by clicking the column header respectively.
156
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Double click an alarm point row to open its dialog box.
You can print and save what you see in the list. A filter function is
available.
22.2.5
Interlocking combinations
To the right of the tree view can the "Interlocking combinations" tab
be available.
This is a list, for the whole system, showing all interlocking
combinations and their properties.
The list can be sorted by clicking the column header respectively.
Double click an interlocking combination row to open its dialog box.
You can print and save what you see in the list. A filter function is
available.
22.2.6
External faults
To the right of the tree view can the "External faults" tab be available.
This is a list, for the whole system, showing all external faults and
their properties.
The list can be sorted by clicking the column header respectively.
Double click an external fault row to open its dialog box.
You can print and save what you see in the list. A filter function is
available.
22.2.7
Technical warnings
To the right of the tree view can the "External faults" tab be available.
This is a list, for the whole system, showing all technical warnings and
their properties.
The list can be sorted by clicking the column header respectively.
Double click a technical warning row to open its dialog box.
You can print and save what you see in the list. A filter function is
available.
157
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
22.2.8
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
External time channels
To the right of the tree view can the "External time channels" tab be
available.
This is a list, for the whole system, showing all external time channels
and their properties.
The list can be sorted by clicking the column header respectively.
Double click an external time channel row to open its dialog box.
You can print and save what you see in the list. A filter function is
available.
22.3
The System menu
22.3.1
Properties
The same dialog box opens as in Figure 27, page 150.
22.3.2
Time channels
Always off and Always on cannot be edited.
The control unit RTC (real time clock) controls the time channels 214. Five intervals (interval = one time on & one time off) can be set
for each day in time channel 2-14.
Time channels can:

disable and re-enable alarm points / zones
158
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x

set Alert Annunciation on / off

disable, re-enable and activate programmable control outputs

set alternative alarm algorithm for analog detector types 430x /
440x on / off

set 2-unit dependence function on / off
The properties for each Time channel (2-14) and each Day of the
week (Monday – Sunday + National Holiday) have to be set for the
channel respectively.
Figure 28. Left: The "Time channel 2" dialog box without any
programming done. Right: One time interval is programmed
for the Monday (time channel 2 is "on" 07:00 – 16:00).
Name: "Time channel n" is default. Normally not changed but an
informative text can be added (e.g. office hours).
Monday: Place the cursor (the "arrow") in the white day field (e.g.
Monday). In the "Cursor Time" area (down to the right) is the actual
cursor time displayed. Move the cursor in the day field. In the
"Cursor Time" area will the corresponding time be displayed. In the
correct time position (e.g. 07:00) click the left mouse button and drag
the cursor to the right (or left) to the next time position (e.g. 16:00)
and drop the cursor. There will now be a box in the day field
indicating the time interval when the time channel is "on". The time
interval (e.g. 07:00 – 16:00) is also displayed in the "Current Day"
area (down to the left).
For each day, five time intervals can be programmed. A time interval
can be edited by dragging the whole interval (or the left / right side of
it) to the left or right in the day field. Alternatively, double click the
time interval box in the day field to open a dialog box for easier time
editing:
159
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
A time interval can be copied in one day field and pasted into another
day field.
Tuesday: Programmed the same way as the Monday.
Wednesday: Programmed the same way as the Monday.
Thursday: Programmed the same way as the Monday.
Friday: Programmed the same way as the Monday.
Saturday: Programmed the same way as the Monday.
Sunday: Programmed the same way as the Monday.
National: Programmed the same way as the Monday.
chapter "National holidays", page 163.
See also
Current day: The programmed time intervals (when the time channel
is "on") for the selected day, are shown here.
Cursor time: The cursor position (time) in the day field respectively,
is shown here.
Time channels 3 - 14 are programmed the same way as time channel
2.
22.3.3
Alarm algorithms
The following is not valid for the 4400 and 4401 detectors in
Advanced mode. (See chapter "Advanced mode", page 138.)
Alarm algorithms
All the different algorithms for the different detector types are shown
in the tree view to the left. Click "+" to expand and "-" collapse the
tree view.
160
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Select one algorithm and click "Edit" and a dialog box displays
depending on the selected algorithm:
Figure 29. Smoke algorithm N-15 for 4301 / 4401, Heat
algorithm Class A1 for 3308 and Combined Decision algorithm
Dec for 4300 / 4400 respectively. All in NORMAL mode.
Detector: Shortening and Type number (e.g. OPT 4301 = Analog
photoelectric (optical) smoke detector, AHD 3308 = Analog heat
detector and AMD 4300 = Analog Multi Detector).
Name: Name of the algorithm (e.g. N-15, Class A1 & Decision).
Normally not changed.
Abbrevation: The algorithm abbreviation (< six characters) as shown
in the EBL512 G3 display, menu H4/U4 (e.g. N-15, A1 & Des).
Normally not changed.
22.3.3.1
Parameters for smoke algorithms
Valid for the detectors 4300 / 4400 and 4301 / 4401.
NORMAL mode.
All in
Offset is a fixed value added to the week average sensor value to get
the "alarm" level respectively, e.g. week average sensor value 1 +
offset 30 = 31 = the fire alarm level (equivalent to 3.1 % obscuration
per meter).142
The step value gives the alarm delay time to the algorithm
respectively, see chapter "Functions / Services / Features", page 109.
The following example is for the N-15 algorithm for the 4301
detector. The values for other algorithms are different.
Offset, smouldering: Offset value, default 15 (1.5%/m).
Offset, pre-warning: Offset value, default 22 (2.2%/m).
Offset, alarm: Offset value, default 30 (3.0%/m).
Level, heavy smoke: Heavy smoke level, default 150 (15%/m).
142
The week average value starts at "1" for a new (clean) detector. The very
first average value will be calculated within two minutes (after SSD
download & restart) and thereafter every week. The fire alarm level will be
adjusted or not adjusted every week, depending on if the latest calculated
week average value is the same as the previous or not, i.e. if it has increased
or if it has decreased. The week average value will normally increase very
slowly in a long-time period, due to contamination.
161
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Step value: Default 10.
NOTE! Changing these parameters will affect the sensitivity and
detection time and should be done by authorised personnel only!!!!!
In addition, a special password is required to change the parameters
for fire alarm.
22.3.3.2
Parameters for heat algorithms
Valid for the detectors 3308 / 3309 and the multi detectors 4300 /
4400. All in NORMAL mode.
The "heat alarm" levels are fixed, i.e. there are no offset values. The
sensor values can be 0-200, which is equivalent to 0-100° C. The rise
time and step down gives a rate-of-rise function (used in the A1
algorithm only). See also chapter "Algorithms for analog heat
detectors", page 116.
The following example is for the A1 algorithm for the 3308 detector.
The values for other algorithms are different.
Level, pre-warning: Level, default 92 (46° C).
Level, alarm: Level, default 112 (56° C).
Level, heavy alarm: Level, default 180 (90° C).
Rise time: Default 8.
Step down: Default 20.
NOTE! Changing these parameters will affect the sensitivity and
detection time and should be done by authorised personnel only!!!!!
In addition, a special password is required to change the fire alarm
parameters.
22.3.3.3
Parameters for combined decision algorithm
Valid for the detectors 4300 / 4400. All in NORMAL mode.
Offset, see "Parameters for smoke algorithms" above. Level, see
"Parameters for heat algorithms" above. See also "4300", page 43.
The following example is for the Dec algorithm for the 4300 detector.
Offset, pre-warning: Offset value, default 50 (5.0%/m).
Offset, alarm: Offset value, default 58 (5.8%/m).
Level, pre-warning: Level, default 50° C
Level, alarm: Level, default 58° C.
NOTE! Changing these parameters will affect the sensitivity and
detection time and should be done by authorised personnel only!!!!!
In addition, a special password is required to change the fire alarm
parameters.
22.3.4
Output Signal Periods
See also chapter "Output signal period", page 86.
162
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
In the list (to the left), Steady (continuously) and Intermittent 0.8 /
0.8 s are already defined since these alternatives are often used. It is
however, possible to define them to something else.
User defined 1-8 have to be defined individually:
Name: Normally changed to something that describes the output
signal (e.g. "Steady") or what it is meant for (e.g. "Alarm devices").
Type: Steady / continuous (default)
Intermittent
Pulse
Steady, delayed activation
Intermittent, delayed activation
Pulse, delayed activation
Steady, delayed de-activation.
Depending on the selected type, one or more of the following fields
might have to be filled-in.
Delay time: Can be set to 0-255 x 0.8 = 0 - 204 sec.
Pulse length: Can be set to 0-255 x 0.8 = 0 - 204 sec.
Pulse off: Can be set to 0-255 x 0.8 = 0 - 204 sec.
De-activation: Can be set to 0-255 x 0.8 = 0 - 204 sec.
22.3.5
National holidays
163
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Up to twenty national holidays can be set for the whole system.143
National holidays can be added one by one, i.e. by selecting a date in
the calendar (up to the right) and click with the left mouse button. A
row with that date will be added in the list (to the left). To delete a
date in the list, click on the date in the calendar with the left mouse
button.
If Microsoft® Outlook® is installed on your PC the national holidays
can be automatically added in the list by clicking "Import holidays
from Outlook…".144
Mark the checkbox "Recurring" if a holiday recur the same date
every year, e.g. Christmas Day, Boxing Day, etc.
Figure 30.
marked).
22.3.6
In this example the first row is selected (blue
Two zone dependence
143
NOTE! ON/OFF times for each time channel (1-14) and every day of the
week (incl. national holidays) have to be set.
144
The National holidays have first to be imported to Microsoft® Outlook.
The number and dates of national holidays varies between different countries.
164
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
See also chapter "2-zone dependence", page 119.
Default for all zones is no two zone dependence.
NOTE!
Normally, only conventional zones (i.e. zone line inputs with
conventional detectors) should be used for two-zone dependence.
For analog / addressable detectors the two-address (unit) dependence
should be used.
Ten (1-10) groups are available.
For each group, write the zone numbers for the two-zone dependent
zones (min. two zones!!!) in the white field/line. Use comma as
punctuation mark between the zone numbers or a sequence (e.g. xxxyyy).
NOTE!
Check so that two or more zones are programmed in each group. (A
single zone in a group will never be able to activate any fire alarm!)
22.3.7
Zone groups
165
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
See also chapter "Zone groups", page 135.
Default for all zones is that they do not belong to any zone group.
Thirty zone groups are available. The default name Zone group 1 - 30
can be changed to a more descriptive name.
For each zone group, write the zone numbers for the zones that should
be included in the zone group in the white field/line. Use comma as
punctuation mark between the zone numbers or a sequence (e.g. xxxyyy).
NOTE!
A zone can only be a member of one zone group. A validation error
will occur if a zone is programmed to more than one zone group.
22.3.8
System information
In this dialog box you can read the following information:
This is what has been programmed so far in the system. The
information will be updated when units etc. are added or deleted.
22.3.9
Edit Alarm texts
The user definable alarm text for each alarm point can be created /
edited in the alarm point dialog box respectively or via the menu:
Systems | Edit Alarm texts. See Text editor, page 133.
22.3.10
User data
To log on to the c.i.e. and/or the Web-server a User name and a
password are required.
Up to ten different User names with corresponding passwords can be
defined for any of the three different User level Types (Information
only, Building officer & Service personnel).
166
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
User level Type Information only gives access to the menus H4,
H6,145 H9 and H10. (Level 2B according to EN54-2.)
User level Type Building officer gives access to the menus H1 – H4,
H6, H7, H9 and H10. (Level 2C according to EN54-2.)
User level Type Service personnel gives access to the menus H1 H10. (Level 3A according to EN54-2.)
For more information regarding user names, passwords, user levels,
logon to a control unit, etc. see EBL512 G3 Operating Instructions,
MEW01777.
NOTE!
It is highly recommended to change the default user names and
passwords.
If the same user names and passwords shall be used for the Webserver put checkmarks in the "WEB" column.
145
NOTE! The faults cannot be acknowledged on this level.
167
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
22.4
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The Tools menu
Figure 31. EBLWin menu "Tools". Some commands are
disabled if you have not logged on to the control unit.
The EBLWin menu "Tools" is used, when the PC is connected to an
EBL512 G3 control unit for e.g. download / backup of SSD.
Validate: The SSD is validated automatically before downloaded to
an EBL512 G3 but can also be done via this menu.
Log on control unit: Log on / Log off to an EBL512 G3. During
logon EBLWin will compare the PC:s clock with the clock in the
control unit. If the difference is more than one hour a message box
will be shown allowing the user to set the clock in the control unit to
the PC:s clock.
NOTE! An EBLWin key 5094 has to be plugged in a USB
port on the PC / Laptop.
Synchronize: (When connected and logged on to an EBL512 G3.)
Data (i.e. faults, disablements, etc.) will be synchronized, i.e. the same
data / information in all control units and EBLWin. Can also be done
via menu H8/S7 in the c.i.e.
Download SSD: (When connected and logged on to an EBL512 G3.)
For downloading of SSD to one or more EBL512 G3 control units and
connected Display Units (e.g. ext. FBP).
Backup SSD: (When connected and logged on to an EBL512 G3.)
For backup (upload) of SSD from all the EBL512 G3 control units and
connected Display Units (e.g. ext. FBP).
Verify SSD: (When connected and logged on to an EBL512 G3.)
The SSD stored in an EBL512 G3 control unit is compared with the
SSD open in EBLWin. If they are the same, the checksums should
also be the same.
168
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Erase SSD: (With EBL512 G3 in boot mode.) The SSD stored in an
EBL512 G3 control unit will be erased. Also the SSW (see Operating
Instructions) will be erased. NOTE! An EBLWin key is required.
Reset user passwords: If any password has been changed via a
control unit menu or via a Web-server, it will be reset to the password
downloaded via the SSD, i.e. the passwords in the EBLWin dialog
box "User data".
Download software: When connected and not logged on to an
EBL512 G3. For download of S/W (.bin file) to an EBL512 G3
control unit (there is one .bin file for each language / customer) or
(when connected to a Display Unit via RS232) for download of S/W
(.bin file) to a Display unit (the .bin file is the same for each language
/ customer). NOTE! An EBLWin key 5094 is required.
Options: EBLWin settings. A Convention (one for each country) is
selected the very first time EBLWin is opened. Can be changed if
Level 2 is selected, see below. Display Unit language can be selected
as well as the EBLWin language.
Advanced functions: Can be one of three alternatives:
No Level selected: Alarm algorithm parameters cannot be changed.
Level 1 selected: All alarm algorithm parameters except the fire alarm
parameters can be changed.
Level 2 selected (which require a special password): All alarm
algorithm parameters can be changed. The convention for the open
installation can be changed.
Backup EBLWeb configuration: (When connected to the Webserver – TCP/IP.) Backup of the Web-server configuration.
Download EBLWeb configuration: (When connected to the Webserver – TCP/IP.) Download of the Web-server configuration. See
Web-server below.
Download EBLWeb software: (When connected to the Web-server
– TCP/IP.) Download of the Web-server software (S/W). See Webserver below.
22.4.1
Web-server
1. First create the SSD for the installation. In menu "System" select
"User data" and check-mark the user names / passwords that shall
be used for the Web-server as well.
2. Add a Web-server to a Control Unit. (C.U. menu: Add Webserver….)
3. Do the Web-server configuration.
4. Download the Web-server software (firmware) version 2.2.x to the
Web-server.
5. Download the Web-server configuration to the Web-server.
"Include SSD Data" shall be check-marked.
6. Do a "power off – power on" Web-server restart.
169
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
170
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
23
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Download SSD
The PC program EBLWin is used for creating the Site Specific Data
(SSD) and to download it to the EBL512 G3 control unit(s) and/or
Display Units 1728, 1735, 1736, 1826 & 1828.
When the installation is ready, i.e. all units connected and the power is
turned on, the SSD download can take place. When a number of
control units are connected in a TLON network, the network has to be
running before the SSD download can take place.
The PC has to be connected to the USB port (type "B") in one control
unit. Start EBLWin and open the wanted installation. Log on to the
control unit via the PC (EBLWin).
NOTE!
No password / access code is required to log on to the control unit,
instead an EBLWin key 5094 is required. This key is plugged in a
USB-port in your PC / Laptop.
In EBLWin (menu "Tools" | "Download SSD..."), you can select the
unit(s), i.e. the control units as well as the Display Units, to which the
SSD shall be downloaded.
Progress bar
Click "Start" to start the download. The progress bar will indicate for
each unit. NOTE! The download is not completed until the
following box is shown:
Click "OK".
171
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
After the SSD download the control unit will restart. A number of
faults might then be generated, e.g. due to not connected units. This
will cause "heavy traffic" on the network, which might affect (delay)
the SSD download to the other units. See also chapter "Single Control
Unit", page 173.
Disconnected at startup
In the COM loop Properties dialog box it is possible to select the
option "Disconnected at startup". The COM loop will then be
disabled directly after the download restart and therefore not generate
any faults.
NOTE!
A COM loop "Disconnected at startup" can be re-connected via menu
H8/S1 but it will then be disconnected again after next restart. Finally
the SSD for that control unit has to be downloaded again with the
option " Disconnected at startup" not selected.
23.1
COM loop menu
23.1.1
Check Loop
In the EBLWin COM loop icon pop-up menu select "Check Loop".
This function can be used after (or before) the download of SSD. See
also chapter "Obsolete units", page 62. The function is as follows:
The control unit will find all units that are connected on the selected
COM loop. If there is a break (cut-off) or short circuit on the loop
only the units in the A-direction will be found and shown, i.e. an
indication where the break (cut-off) or short circuit is located.
For all units, the address (1-255) and the type of unit will be reported
to EBLWin. All differences compared to the installation (SSD) that is
open in EBLWin will be listed and can be saved and/or printed out.
"Unknown device" means that the type cannot be identified, e.g.
because it is an old type (23xx) or it is a faulty unit.
"Several reply" means that more than one unit have got the same
address or bad COM loop communication.
NOTE!
During this check the COM loop will be disconnected (disabled) and
no alarms or faults can be activated. Disconnected COM loop is
indicated by the LED Fault / Disablements "General disablements"
(L10).
23.1.2
Auto generate loop
The units connected to the selected COM loop will be identified by
EBLWin and added to the COM loop with some auto generated
settings, which can be edited before the download of the SSD to the
control unit takes place. See also chapter "Obsolete units", page 62.
172
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
23.2
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Single Control Unit
Start the SSD download from EBLWin, see page 171. A text message
will be shown in the control unit display: "Downloading SSD".
When the download is completed and the control unit restart, a fault
message will be shown in the display:
FAULT: Restart control unit nn, code 25
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM
Code 25 indicates a normal restart after the SSD download.
Acknowledge the restart fault.
If the download was not ok another fault will be generated.
FAULT: Site specific data (SSD), CU nn
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM
This text message means that the SSD have not been downloaded
properly, i.e. a new download has to be performed.
23.3
Control Units in a TLON network
The SSD for all control units can be downloaded via a PC / EBLWin,
connected to one control unit. The download will be performed to the
control units, one at a time, according to the chapter "Single Control
Unit" above. The download is performed in a consecutive order, i.e.
0-1-2-3-4-……-29 amongst the selected control units but the control
unit where the PC is connected will automatically be the last one to
get the SSD downloaded.
When the SSD download to a control unit is completed, that control
unit will automatically restart and generate a restart fault.
23.4
User definable text messages download
Each alarm point, zone and zone line input can have a unique user
definable alarm text programmed via EBLWin. When a fire alarm is
activated (e.g. an addressable alarm point), the presentation number
(Zone - Address) will be shown in the control unit display and in the
ext. FBP 1826 / 1828 display146 together with its alarm text.
All alarm texts, up to 40 alphanumeric characters each, are created and
downloaded (included in the site specific data – SSD) via EBLWin.
When a printer is available the alarm text will be printed with the
presentation number.
A fault message for an alarm point, zone or zone line input will also
show the alarm text.
146
This is also valid for the Ext. Presentation unit 1728 and the Alert
Annunciation units 1735 / 1736.
173
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
24
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Download software (S/W)
The latest software (S/W) version of the EBL512 G3 system program
is factory downloaded before the delivery. Due to continual
development and improvement, different S/W versions can be found.
The valid S/W version for the Main board 5010 and the MMI board
5011 respectively, can be read in menu H4/U8 (Information) or via
EBLWin. On site, new S/W can be downloaded via EBLWin.
EBL512 G3 type 5000 has both a Main board 5010 and an MMI board
5011. EBL512 G3 type 5001 has only a Main board 5010.
On site can also new S/W for the 1728, 1735, 1736, 1826 & 1828
units be downloaded via EBLWin. See the "Technical Description"
for the unit respectively.
24.1
Single control unit (c.i.e.)
A single c.i.e. shall not have any TLON connection board 5090
mounted. (When a c.i.e. has a TLON connection board 5090
mounted, it is expected to be one c.i.e. in a TLON network and TLON
network programming is required.)
To download a new software (system program) version, a PC and
EBLWin147 are used. The BIN file that shall be downloaded contains
software for the main board 5010, software for the MMI board 5011
and a text file, i.e. there is one BIN file for each language / country.
Connect the PC to the USB connector in the c.i.e. and start EBLWin.
Do not logon. Check that the EBLWin key is plugged in a PC spare
USB port.
1. In the "Tools" menu select "Download Software…" to open the
"Download software to control unit / display unit" dialog box and
do the required settings:
147
To logon to the control unit and to download software, an EBLWin key
(5094) is required in a PC spare USB port.
174
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Progress bar
Select the path and the Software file name, e.g.
English_EBL512G3_220.BIN (220 = version 2.2.0.)
2. Select the EBL512 G3 type, 5000 (with front, display etc.) or
5001, (a gray box without front, display etc.).
3. Select the COM port to be used on your PC.148 Do not click
"Start".
4. Set the Main board 5010 in "boot" mode, i.e. hold the "BOOT"
button (SW2) down and push the "RESET" button (SW1)
momentarily. Release the "BOOT" button. The Main board LED
"D24" is turned off while the Main board is in "boot" mode.
5. Start the download, i.e. click "Start".
If it is an EBL512 G3 type 5000 (i.e. with front and MMI board),
another dialog box opens,
Set the MMI board 5011 in "boot" mode, i.e. hold the "BOOT"
button (SW2) down and push the "RESET" button (SW1)
momentarily. Release the "BOOT" button. The MMI board LED
148
A tip: Check in Control Panel | Device Manager | Ports (COM & LPT) |
EBL512 G3 Serial Port (COMx).
175
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
"D18" is turned off and the buzzer is turned on. The MMI board
is in "boot" mode.
6. Click "OK". The buzzer is turned off and the download
continues.
The download status is indicated by the progress bar.
7. When the progress bar has gone from "red to green" the download
is completed and the following dialog box opens:
Click "Yes" and the control unit will restart.
After the restart the following fault messages will be shown:
FAULT: Restart control unit nn, code 00
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM
FAULT: Restart control unit nn, code 50
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM
Code 00 / 50 indicates a normal restart of the Main board / MMI board
after the S/W download . Acknowledge the restart faults.
8. LED "Operation" (L5) on the front shall now be turned on and all
other LEDs on the front shall normally be turned off.
24.2
Control Units in a TLON network
All control units connected to a TLON network shall have the same
software version.
For download of new software in each control unit, follow the
procedure described above.
Since some control units do not have contact with some control units
during the downloading, the following faults might be generated:
FAULT: Control unit xx has no contact with control unit xx,
network x
yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm
FAULT: CU xx has wrong information
yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm
The faults have to be acknowledged.
176
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
25
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Compatibility
Regarding backwards compatibility:

Addressable short circuit isolator 4313 is compatible with the
older Addressable short circuit isolator 4370.
NOTE! In system EBL512 G3 shall all Addressable short circuit
isolators be set to NORMAL mode.

If the Analog smoke detector 3304 has to be used in an EBL512
G3 system, the detectors with serial no. 7000001 – 7004527
cannot be used in NORMAL mode.
177
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
26
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Cable types
A fire alarm installation is a safety installation and it is important that
the cables used are of correct types and according to national
regulations, e.g. regarding cable colour, method of mounting, etc. Fire
alarm cables should, when possible, be installed as far away from
other cables as possible, in order to avoid disturbances from these.
The maximum cable length is depending on the cable type (area,
twisted / not twisted pairs, screen / no screen), the units' current
consumption, etc.
26.1
TLON Network cables
A shielded Belden cable with twisted pair should be used, e.g. JY (St)
Y 2 x 2 x 0.8 or 7703 NH 1 pair 22 AWG.149
See also separate TLON Technical description.
26.2
COM loop cables
Loop topology is used for highest safety, i.e. the cable, connected in
the control unit, returns back to the control unit. In case of a break on
the loop, communication in two directions starts.
See dwg. 512 G3 – 25, – 31 and – 41.
Cable length is depending on the type and number of loop units, etc.
See chapter "COM loop cable length", page 180 and dwg. 512 G3 41.
ELQYB 2 x 1 mm (0.75 mm2) or equivalent (twisted pair).
ELQYB 10 x 2 x 1 mm or equivalent, when feeder line is required.
If screened cable is used, the screen shall be connected close to each
loop unit and only incoming (or outgoing) screen to the c.i.e. earth
point.
26.3
Ext. FBP / Display Units cables
RS485. Max. cable length < 1200 m to the furthest away D.U.
Cable type LIHCH-TP 2 x 2 x0.75 mm2 or equivalent (twisted pair).
26.4
Conventional zone line cables
Inputs to 8 zones expansion board 4580 and Multipurpose I/O unit
3361. See dwg. 512 G3 - 33 and - 36.
ELQRB 2 x 0.6 mm (0.3 mm2) or equivalent. Max. 50 ohm cable
resistance (= 400 m cable length).
149
For longest possible cable length Echelon recommends an unshielded
cable type but the EBL512 G3 VdS approval require shielded cable.
178
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
26.5
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Alarm device cables
Alarm devices (sounders, etc.), see dwg. 512 G3 – 23, – 35 and – 38.
ELQRB 2 x 0.6 mm (0.3 mm2) or equivalent.
ELQRB 10 x 2 x 1 mm (0.75 mm2) or equivalent, when feeder line is
required.
26.6
Other cables
External indicator (LED), door release magnets, etc. E.g:
ELQRB 2 x 0.6 mm (0.3 mm2) or equivalent.
179
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
27
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
COM loop cable length
The cable length and max. COM loop current, are depending on the
number and type of loop units and the cable type, see Figure 32 and
Figure 33, page 181 and 182 respectively.
One of the graphs in each figure has to be used depending on which
type of units that are connected to the COM loop. Start checking the
terms below for Graph 1, Graph 2 and finally Graph 3.
1. Graph with square dots (when “old” conventional smoke
detectors requiring > 15 V are used).
Has to be used when at least one of the following units are used:
2335 / 3361150 + (2316, 2317, 2318 or 2321 plugged in a 2324)
2330 + (2316, 2317, 2318 or 2321 plugged in 2330 or plugged
in a 2324 connected on the external line)
2. Graph with circular dots (when no "old" conventional smoke
detectors requiring > 15 V, are used)
Has to be used when at least one of the following units are used:
2300 / 2304
2226 / 2821
2330 + (4318, 4350, 4352, 4452 and all other conventional
types
except 2316, 2317, 2318 or 2321 plugged in base 2330 / 2324)
2335 / 3361150 + (4318, 4350, 4352, 4452 and all other
conventional types except 2316, 2317, 2318 or 2321 plugged
in base 2324.)
2333
2340 / 2341
3. Graph with no dots
Shall normally be used, i.e. if Graph 1 or Graph 2 above not has to be
used.
The following two figures are showing graphs for maximum
conductor (wire) resistance and maximum cable length respectively.
Valid for the cable type ELQYB 2 x 1 mm (0.75 mm2) or equivalent.
Excel sheet
An Excel sheet is also available for an easy check of the current
consumption, cable length, etc.
EBLWin
In the COM loop pop-up menu select "Properties..." to open a window
showing the quiescent and max. current consumption for the COM
loop units connected on that COM loop.
150
The monitored input used as a zone line input (Z).
180
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Maximum conductor resistance
Ohm
45
40
2 x 1 mm (0.75 mm2)
24.5 ohm / km
Conductor resistance
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
40
80
120 160
200
240 280 320
Total COM loop unit current consumption
mA
Figure 32. Graphs showing the total conductor resistance in relation to the
COM loop units' total current consumption. NOTE! The graphs start at "0
mA" but graph 1 ends at "320 mA" and graph 2 ends at "350 mA". End of
graph = max. allowed loop current. (42.3 ohm = 863 m cable length.)
NOTE! The graphs are valid for the cable type ELQYB 2 x 1 mm
(0.75mm2) with the conductor resistance 24.5 ohm / km. The total
conductor resistance (ohm) = L conductor (ohm) + C conductor
(ohm).
181
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Maximum cable length
Meter
900
850
800
2 x 1 mm (0.75 mm2)
750
24.5 ohm / km
700
650
Cable length
600
550
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
0
40
80
120
160
200
240
Total COM loop unit current consumption
280
320
mA
Figure 33. Graphs showing the cable length in relation to the COM loop units' total
current consumption. NOTE! The graphs start at "0 mA" and 863 m cable length
respectively but graph 1 ends at "320 mA" and graph 2 ends at "350 mA". End of
graph = max. allowed loop current. (863 m cable length = 42.3 ohm.)
NOTE! The graphs are valid for the cable type ELQYB 2 x 1 mm
(0.75mm2) with the conductor resistance 24.5 ohm / km. The total
conductor resistance (ohm) = L conductor (ohm) + C conductor
(ohm).
182
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
28
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Current consumption
The different loop units have different current consumption. Note that
some units have much higher current consumption in "active state".
To check the current consumption on the COM loops, cable lengths,
etc. the tables below can be used. See also dwg. 512-41 and chapter
"COM loop cable length", page 180. Also, to get a total current
consumption overview and to check if the battery capacity is enough,
the tables below can be used.
The current consumption is normally shown at nominal voltage (24 V
DC), in Normal state (quiescent) and in Alarm state (active). By
battery back-up (i.e. no mains) the voltage can be 27 – 21 V DC.
See also chapter "Power supply", page 188.
NOTE! A grey row in the tables = obsolete unit, can be found in old
installations.
C.i.e. units
Normal state
(quiescent) (mA)
Alarm state
(active) (mA)
Control unit 5000 (without printer)
151
230
290
Control unit 5000 (with printer)
151
253
312152
Control unit 5001 ("grey box without front, printer, etc.)
151
179
214
23
350
15153
15154
8 relays expansion board 4581
15
15
In & outputs expansion board 4583, no units connected
15
15
approx. 5
approx. 5
60
65
Printer in 5000
8 zones expansion board 4580 (p.c.b. 9287-3A)
TLON connection board 1590 / 5090
Web-server II 1598
The control unit values above are measured during battery back-up
(i.e. no mains).
151
Control unit – backup battery powered. COM loops and ext. equipment
current consumption not included.
152
When the printer is active the current consumption is 667 mA
momentarily.
153
Add 0.5 mA per input (zone) for end-of-line capacitor (470 nF) and 3 mA
per input for end-of-line resistor (10K).
154
Add 30 mA per input (zone) activated. (Each input has a 30 mA current
limitation, i.e. also for short-circuit on the line.) NOTE! For p.c.b. 9287-2B:
22.2 / 22.2 instead of 15 / 15.
183
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
COM loop units (input units, etc.)
Normal state
(quiescent) (mA)
Alarm state
(activated) (mA)
Analog smoke detector 2300 / 2304 + analog base 2312
155
1.7 / 1.8
3.7 / 3.8
Analog smoke detector 3304 + analog base 3312
156
0.3
2.3
Analog heat detector 3308 + analog base 3312xx
156
0.3
2.3
Analog heat detector, enclosed 3309
156
0.2
1.7
Analog multi detector 4300 + analog base 3312xx
156
0.3
2.3
Analog smoke detector 4301 + analog base 3312xx
156
0.3
2.3
Analog multi detector 4400 + analog base 3312xx
0.3157
1.3158
Analog smoke detector 4401 + analog base 3312xx
0.3157
1.3158
Analog multi detector with CO 4402 + analog base 3312xx
0.3157
1.3158
Addressable heat detector 2340 / 2341
155
2
5
Addressable zone interface, isolated 2226
159
3
6
Addressable IS zone interface 2821
159
3
6
Isolated zone interface 2822
3
6
Addressable zone interface 2335
5
20
Addressable manual call point 2333
2
5
Addressable manual call point 3333 / 3339
2
5
1.6
2.7
2
5
2
5
1.7
3.5
3.9
13.2
6
6
Aspirating smoke detector Aspect NITRO AE2010 N-P
2.1
2.1
Aspirating smoke detector Aspect GRIZZLE AE2010 G-P
2.1
2.1
Addressable manual call point with isolator 4433 / 4439
Local Alarm Acknowledgement Unit 4445
160
Alarm Acknowledge Facility Control (AAFC)
Addressable detector base 2330 + detector
Incl. external line.
Addressable base station for wireless units 4620
155
External indicator (LED) current consumption. 2216: add 2 mA. 2217 /
2218: add 1 mA.
156
External indicator (LED) current consumption. 2216: add 2 mA. 2217 /
2218: add 1 mA.
Analog base with isolator 4313 can be used instead of Analog base 3312.
157
Plus 0.025 mA if green polling LED is used.
158
Plus 0.5 mA if External indicator (LED) is used (e.g. 2218).
159
2226 / 2821 also require external power supply, 24V DC, 30 mA.
160
This unit is available on the Australian market only.
161
Ext. LED current consumption max. 1 mA. Alarm state on detector and
external line: 15.4 mA. NOTE! The external line can be used for an ext.
indicator (LED) or for conventional detector(s) that will get the same
presentation number (zone-address) as the detector plugged in the base.
184
161
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
COM loop units (input units, etc.)
Aspirating smoke detector Aspect LAZEER AE2010 L-P
Normal state
(quiescent) (mA)
Alarm state
(activated) (mA)
2.1
2.1
NOTE! On each COM loop, up to 5 sensors / detectors can have their LEDs lit at the same time.
COM loop units (output units, etc.)
Normal state
(quiescent) (mA)
Alarm state
(activated) (mA)
2.2
2.2
< 1.3
< 1.3
2.2
max. 12163
<6
<6
<15
<15
1
max. 13
1.8
< 10
2
max. 6 / 12
Addressable sounder base 3379
0.75
max 2.5165
Addressable beacon 4380
1.7
4-5
Light indicator 4383
1.5
3.5 ±0.5
max. 6
max. 6
4-6
4-6
Addressable short circuit isolator 4370
162
Analog base with isolator 4313
Addressable multipurpose I/O unit 3361
164
Addressable 2 voltage outputs unit 3364
(Addressable) External power supply 3366
Addressable siren 3377
Addressable siren with isolator 4477
Addressable sounder base 3378 (low/high)
I/O matrix board 4582
166
Fan control application board 4594
162
Detector not included.
163
Only if the input In 0 is used as a zone line input, else approx. 2.2 mA.
164
External 24 V DC power supply also required, e.g. the 3366 unit.
165
High sound output: 4.5 mA.
166
Two 4594 boards are mounted on a Fan control panel 4594. 24 V DC
power supply also required.
185
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Other units
Normal state
(quiescent) (mA)
Alarm state
(activated) (mA)
Routing equipment (Fire brigade tx / Fault tx)
Acc. to the producer
Acc. to the producer
External Presentation unit 1728
26@24 V / 48@12 V
49@24 V / 88@12 V
Alert Annunciation unit 1735 / 1736
26@24 V / 48@12 V
42@24 V / 79@12 V
External FBP 1826 / 1828
26@24 V / 48@12 V
49@24 V / 88@12 V
4@24 V / 7@12 V
4@24 V / 7@12 V
0
Acc. to the producer
Acc. to the producer
0
10
40
167
Printer 1835 (for ext. FBP 1826)
Alarm devices (sounders, etc.)
Door release magnets
Alert annunciation controller 1740
NOTE! Regarding the 1728, 1735, 1736, 1826, 1828 and 1835 units,
see the next page.
167
When the printer is active the current consumption is 161 / 345 mA
momentarily.
186
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
The following table is a help when calculating the cable length and/or
the number of units. The table is based on the current consumption at
the lowest power supply voltage allowed i.e. 21 V DC by battery
back-up (no mains).
Recommended cable type is LIHCH-TP 2 x 2 x 0.75 mm2.
Wire resistance for this cable is approx. 25 ohm / 1000 m.
Up to sixteen units can be connected but it is depending on the type of
units and the cable (type and length).
Number
of units
Allowed cable resistance (ohm) / length (m)
Units
Units
Units
1735, 1736
1728, 1735, 1736,
1728, 1735, 1736,
168
1826
, 1828
168
&
no printers 1835
1826, 1828 &
169
one
printer 1835
8
12 / 240
11 / 220
-
7
14 / 280
13 / 260
-
6
17 / 340
15 / 300
-
5
20 / 400
18 / 360
-
4
25 / 500
21 / 420
4 / 80
3
34 / 680
28 / 560
10 / 200
2
50 / 1000
42 / 840
16 / 320
1
100 / max. 1200
84 / max. 1200
18 / 360
Explanation: 12 (ohm) ÷ 25 (ohm wire resistance per 1000 m) = 480
m but the wire goes from the c.i.e. to the last unit and back to the c.i.e.
again, i.e. the cable length = 480 (m) ÷ 2 = 240 m.
NOTE!
The table is based on the recommended cable type. If a cable with
greater area is used the wire resistance (ohm per 1000 m) will be
lower and the possible cable length will be longer.
It is also possible to use an external power supply, e.g. 3366, when a
greater number of units are required or if a longer cable length is
required.
168
Max. six 1826 / 1828 units.
169
Printing will only be performed if and when the door in the ext. FBP is
being opened. If the door is not opened until after all the alarms are reset,
there will be no printing.
187
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
29
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Power supply
Main power source
Normally the EBL512 G3 control unit is powered by the built-in
power supply (rectifier), 230 V AC / 24 V DC ±1%, 6.5 A.
Second power source
By loss of 230 V AC etc. the control unit is powered by a backup
battery170, i.e. two Sealed Lead-Acid batteries, 12 V, 17 – 65 Ah (see
tables on page 192 and forward).
There is space in the EBL512 G3 control unit for two Sealed LeadAcid batteries, 12 V, 28 Ah, physical size 175 x 165 x 125 mm.
Batteries shall fulfil UL94V-0.
Recommended battery type is Panasonic LC-P1228AP.
Larger batteries have to be placed outside the control unit.
The batteries and the rectifier are connected to the Main board 5010
(see dwg. 512 G3 – 21), which also handles the charging of the
batteries.
2 x 12 V,
17-65 Ah
BATTERY
POWER
SUPPLY
(21-28 V)
CONTROL UNIT CURRENT
CONSUMPTION (INCL.
CONNECTED UNITS / EQUIPM.)
MAX. 3.3 A)
See tables on
page 192.
27 V
MAIN BOARD
5010
F2 T6.3A
24 V
T6.3A
Fuse F between the
batteries: T6.3A
F1
BATTERY CHARGING CURRENT
MAX. 2.4 A
(27.3 ±0.1 V @ 20°C but 27.3 ±0.7 V
depending on the battery temperature.)
)
BATTERY CHARGING CURRENT
MAX. 3.0 A (24 V)
MAX. 6.5 A (24 V)
=
~
POWER SUPPLY
(RECTIFIER) 5037
230 V AC / 24 VDC
MAINS, 230 V AC
Figure 34. EBL512 G3 power supply block diagram.
Fuses F, F1 & F2: T6.3A H 250 V (5x20 mm Ceramic).
Batteries inside the c.i.e.: Max. 28 Ah.
170
NOTE! The batteries (2 x 12 V) are not included in the Control unit type
no. 5000 & 5001. Batteries with the same physical size but with different
capacities are available on the market (e.g. 24 / 28 Ah).
188
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
EBL512 G3 is a very flexible system, i.e. number of and types of loop
units, number of and types of expansion boards, ext. FBPs, ext.
equipment, etc. can vary from one control unit to another.
29.1
Charger functions
According to EN54-4, section 5.3.1 b): The charger shall be
designed and rated so that a battery discharged to its final voltage can
be recharged to at least 80% of its rated capacity within 24 hours and
to its rated capacity within another 48 hours.
29.1.1
Charging
If the EN54-4 section is to be fulfilled, the battery capacity of the
backup batteries is limited to 65 Ah.
However, batteries of larger capacity are possible to use but will not
be recharged within the prescribed time interval, i.e. an EN54
violation.
Batteries of smaller capacity, i.e. < 17 Ah171, are not recommended
since the charging current in step 1 (see below) is 2.4 A, which
normally is higher than the recommended maximum charging current
for these batteries. Too high charging current can cause abnormal
internal heating which may damage the batteries.
29.1.2
Battery charging functions:
Battery charging is performed in two steps:
1. Constant current. The charging current is constant (fixed)
until the battery / charging voltage reaches 29 V.
2. Constant voltage. The charging voltage is reduced from 29 to
something between 26.6 and 28.2 V (depending on the
temperature) and will be constant (fixed) at this level until the
batteries are fully charged.
When the battery is fully charged the stand-by "charging current" is 00.5 A (typical 0.1 A) and the "charging voltage" will stay constant
(fixed) at the "step 2" level, until the batteries have been discharged
and have to be charged again. A new charging cycle will then start.
The duration of "step 1" and "step 2" respectively is depending on the
battery shape when the charging starts.
29.1.3
Security functions
 The battery charging will be turned off if the current from the
Rectifier 5037 to the Main board 5010 exceeds 6.3 A. The
battery charging will remain turned off as long as the EBL512
G3 current consumption exceeds 3.3 A. The following fault
message will be shown:
171
The Panasonic 17 Ah battery of type LC-RD1217AP can be used.
189
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
FAULT: Control
consumption
unit
xx
high
current
 In case of charger out of work the following fault message will
be shown:
FAULT: Charger control unit xx
 In order to not damage the batteries, the voltage output will be
switched off at approx. 18.0 V. This only happens in case of
no main power source (230 V AC), i.e. when the backup
batteries are used as power source.
 If the battery voltage is below 10 V (5 V per battery), the
battery charging will be turned off. (The batteries are
damaged and have to be changed.)
 In case of no mains and after a time delay of 1-300 minutes
(programmable in EBLWin but max. 30 min. according to the
EN54-2 standard), the following fault message will be shown:
FAULT: Mains, control unit xx
29.2
Current consumption calculations
For each control unit, in order to get a current consumption overview
so that the rectifier will not be overloaded and to check / calculate the
required battery capacity, the total EBL512 G3 current consumption
(excl. battery charging current) have to be calculated. NOTE! There
is no battery charging during fire alarm.
Use the values in chapter "Current consumption", page 183, to
calculate the following current consumptions:
 ICN = current consumption for the control unit172 in normal
state.
 IRN = current consumption for all other equipment173 in
normal state.
 ICA = current consumption for the control unit172 in alarm
state.
 IRA = current consumption for all other equipment174 in
alarm state.
The total EBL512 G3 current consumption in Normal (quiescent)
state: ITN = ICN + IRN
The total EBL512 G3 current consumption in Alarm (activated)
state: ITA = ICA + IRA
172
Including the COM loop units but excl. the battery charging current.
173
External equipment connected to the control unit (e.g. ext. FBPs, door
release magnets, relays, routing equipment, etc.).
174
External equipment connected to the control unit (e.g. ext. FBPs,
sounders, relays, routing equipment, etc.).
190
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Comments regarding (ITN):
ITN shall be < 0.93 A if the built-in battery is a 28 Ah battery, because
this results (theoretically) in 30 hours battery backup time.
ITN is max. 3.3 A but if the required battery backup time is 30 hours
ITN can be max. 0.93 A.
Comments regarding (ITA):
ITA has to be < 6.3 A. (The battery charging will be turned off in
conjunction with fire alarm activated in the system.)
For the total EBL512 G3 current consumption in relation to backup
time, see tables in chapter "Battery - second power source", page 191.
29.3
Power supply (rectifier) - main power
source
The power supply unit (5037) technical data is 230 V AC / 24 V DC,
6.5 A but the main board fuse F1 = 6.3 A, i.e. the total current
consumption incl. max. battery charging current must not at any
time exceed 6.3 A. Allowed input voltage is 176-264 V AC. The
output voltage is 24 V with a tolerance of ±1%. 175
29.4
Battery - second power source
Only batteries with a specified "Final voltage" of 10.5 V must be used.
Find out the required battery backup time, according to national
regulations / customer demands, in normal state and in alarm state.
Calculate the battery capacity required in normal state (QN) and the
battery capacity required in alarm state (QA) respectively.
 QN (Ah) = ITN (A) x battery backup time in normal state (h)
 QA (Ah) = ITA (A) x battery backup time in alarm state (h)
The total battery capacity Q = QN + QA (Ah)
The electrical capacity of the batteries varies with ambient
temperature and discharge current. Furthermore the battery voltage at
the end of a discharging period is not the same as at the start. For this
reason it is wise to round up the calculated capacity and add 10%, as
safety margin. Note! If the ambient temperature is below 20 °C the
safety margin has to be even larger since the electrical capacity of the
batteries decreases. At 0 °C add 30% and at 10 °C add 20% to the
calculated capacity.
The following tables show the relation between the total current
consumption in normal state (ITN) and the backup time.
NOTE! The values are calculated and will only give you a rough idea
of the backup time.
175
The output voltage is factory set to 24 V. On the rectifier is a
potentiometer for output voltage adjustment (±10%) available. Do not use
this potentiometer unless the output voltage is not 24 V.
191
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
A battery < (24) 28 Ah176 can be placed inside the control unit.
A battery > (24) 28 Ah has to be placed outside the control unit.
NOTE! For external batteries the following is valid: Max. 3 m cable
length (min. 4 mm2). National regulations have to be followed, e.g.
regarding external fuses etc. Also, the voltage drop has to be as low
as possible, not to affect the battery checking function.
The relation between the total current consumption in normal
state (ITN) and the backup time.
One table for the built-in 28 Ah batteries and one table for the external
65 Ah batteries:
NOTE! Theoretical values.
Built-in 28 Ah batteries:
ITN (A)
3.3
3.1
2.55
2
1.55
1
0.93
0.8
0.6
0.4
Backup time (hours)
8½
9
11
14
18
28
30
35
46
70
External 65 Ah batteries.
ITN (A)
3.3
3.25
2.7
2.2
1.6
1.0
0.9
0.65
0.4
29.5
Backup time (hours)
19½
20
24
30
40
65
72
100
162
Fuses
There are power supply fuses on the Main board 5010 as follows:
F1 = T6.3A Ceramic. +24 V DC from the rectifier (5037).
176
The battery's physical size is 175 x 165 x 125 mm.
192
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
F2 = T6.3 A Ceramic. + to/from batteries
Between the batteries:
F = T6.3 A Ceramic.
29.6
Form / Table of current consumption
Some national regulations require different forms / tables regarding
current consumption, to be filled-in. In such a case an ampere meter
shall be used to read a true value instead of a calculated current
consumption.
A tip: Turn off the main power source (230 V AC) and use e.g. a
"clamp current meter" on one of the wires between one of the batteries
and the Main board 5010, to read the true total control unit current
consumption.
An approx. value is displayed via menu H5/A4.
193
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
30
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
S/W versions
Due to continual development and improvement, different S/W
versions can be found.
Different S/W versions can be found on different markets.
The S/W versions listed below were the valid ones when this
document was written (the date of this document or date of revision).
S/W for:
Latest version
Required version
5000 / 5001; EBL512 G3
2.2.0
2.2.0
4580; 8 zones expansion board,
P.c.b. no. 9287-2B
1.0.5
1.0.2
4580; 8 zones expansion board,
P.c.b. no. 9287-3A
2.0.4
2.0.4
4581; 8 relays expansion board
1.0.2
1.0.2
4582; I/O Matrix board
1.0.4
1.0.2
4583; Inputs and Outputs expansion board
1.0.2
1.0
1.0.4DE
1.0.4DE
5090; TLON connection board
1.0.0
1.0.0
1728; Ext. Presentation unit (EPU)
1.4.1
1.4.1
1735 / 1736; Alert Annunciation unit (AAU)
1.4.1
1.4.1
1826 / 1828; Ext. Fire Brigade Panel (FBP)
1.4.1
1.4.1
EBLWin
2.2.0
2.2.0
2.0.1
1.2
2.2.0
2.2.0
4583DE; Inputs and Outputs expansion board
TLON Manager
1598 Web-server II
177
177
The Web server is used in other systems as well. The web-server S/W
will be downloaded via the PC program "EBLWin V2.2.x". NOTE! The
EBLWin version and the EBL512 G3 S/W version has to be the same (i.e. the
first two digits; 2.2.x -- 2.2.x).
194
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
31
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Technical data
Voltage
Primary (V AC): 230 (176-264) -- 1.6 A
System (V DC): 24178
Current consumption (A)
Quiescent / active: Depending on type (5000 or 5001), type and
number of exp. boards, connected external equipment, etc.
See chapter "Current consumption", page 183
Ambient temperature (oC)
Operating: -5 to +40
Storage: -30 to +60
Ambient humidity (%RH)
max. 90, non condensing
Ingress protection rating
IP 30
Size H x W x D (mm)
5000: 628 x 438 x 187. See also drawing 512 G3 - 01
5001: 625 x 418 x 177.
Weight (kg)
5000 without printer: 23.1
5000 with printer: 23.6
5001: 19
Colour
5000: Metal cabinet: Aluminium & light grey (NCS S 1500-N / PMS
Cool Gray 2)
5001: Metal cabinet: light grey (NCS S 1500-N / PMS Cool Gray 2)
Approvals
EC certificate no. 0786-CPD-20982
EN54-2:1997 / A1:2006, EN54-4:1997 / A2:2006
The Swedish front conforms to SS3654.
178
The rated output voltage is 24 V DC ± 1% for the main power source
(rectifier). Max. ripple 240 mVp-p. The rated output voltage for the second
power source (backup battery) is 20-27 V DC.
195
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
32
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Limitations
See also "Control Unit / TLON Network", page 18.
32.1
User definable texts
All alarm points etc. can have its own "alarm text" in EBL512 G3.
At least 617 "User definable texts" can be programmed per 1728,
1735, 1736, 1826 and 1828 unit.179
32.2
C.i.e. / System
Max. number of "items" for the system is the same as per C.i.e. if
nothing else is specified:
......table on following page...
179
The texts have to be with "English characters" but for some languages
might some already defined language dependent characters be used.
196
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Item
C.i.e.
System
General fire alarm via progr. input
100
External fault via progr. input
50
Programmable inputs
512
Programmable outputs (= control
expressions)180
512
Technical warnings
100
Addressable 2 voltage outputs unit
3364
40
Interlocking Combinations
400
4000181
Presentation numbers / alarm points182
that can be presented in the display(s)
in case of fire alarm
512
512
Presentation numbers182 that can be
programmed
512
30 x 512 =
15 360
512183
999
Zones that can be programmed
30 x 50
30 x 100
Faults
300
Disabled zones
512
Disabled alarm points (zone/address) +
Disabled COM loops
200184
Disabled outputs
200185
Disabled interlocking outputs
200186
Sensors activating SERVICE signal
Max. number of LAA zones
(Max. 5 detectors per LAA zone.)
200
100
180
Approx. 4000 trigger conditions can be used in these control expressions.
181
Max. 100 user definable texts can be displayed "at the same time".
182
Presentation number is a ZONE only or ZONE – ADDRESS.
183
Any zone number between 001 and 999 can be used for the 512 zones.
184
Zone/address disabled via time channel not included.
185
Control outputs disabled via menu H2/B3 and Alarm devices disabled via
menu H2/B4 not included.
186
Interlocking outputs disabled via menu H2/B3 not included.
197
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
33
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
National regulations
When planning a fire alarm installation, national regulations, customer
demands, etc. have to be followed.
EBL512 G3 is very flexible. Many functions / facilities are built-in
the system, e.g. in the S/W and EBLWin.
When downloading S/W and SSD, different settings, conventions,
languages, etc. can be set to fulfil national regulations.
198
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
34
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Drawings / connection diagrams
Resulting from continual development and improvement, all
dimensions quoted are approximate only and subject to change
without notice, as are other technical features and data.
199
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
MEW01776
Rev: -
35
Planning Instructions Fire alarm system EBL512 G3, V2.2.x
Revision history
200
This page has deliberately been left blank.
This page has deliberately been left blank.
Panasonic Eco Solutions Nordic AB
Jungmansgatan 12, SE-211 19 Malmö, Sweden
Tel: +46 (0)40 697 70 00 • Fax: +46 (0)40 697 70 99
E-mail: [email protected] • Internet: http://pesn.panasonic.se

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project